q-checker v1.11.2 for catia v4--user manualftp.transcat-plm.com/pub/tcsoft/qcheckerv4_1112/... ·...

Q-CHECKER V1.11.2

for CATIA® V4

USERS MANUAL

Orientation Symbols Used in the Manual For better orientation in the manual the following symbols are used:

Orientation panel

Geometry—

Solid/SKD—

Faces—

Mini-elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids/SKD

Folder 1-st level Folder

2-nd level Folder 3-d level Criterion name

Here you find the criterion name and the placed over criterion group names. On the left side the highest level is shown. These titles are equal to the folder names in the criterion window of Q-CHECKER.

Warning triangle

The warning triangle refers to cr i t ica l c i rcumstances, which should be considered i m p e r a t i v e l y in order to avoid s e r i o u s problems in your work.

Hint symbol

The light bulb relates to hints , which provide you with practical examples to simplify your work.

Note symbol

The hand symbol relates to notes , which you should pay attention to in order to assure that you can work without problems.

Info-Symbol

The info symbol relates to background information.

Step Symbol

The work steps' symbol refers to a s tep-by-step instruct ion sheet.

TRANSCAT in the Internet: http://www.transcat-plm.com/

Q-CHECKER in the Internet: http://www.q-checker.com/

Q-CHECKER Hotline: Phone: +49 721 970 43 100 E-mail: [email protected]

© TransCAT GmbH & Co. KG, 2005

T A B L E O F C O N T E N T S

© TransCAT GmbH & Co. KG 3 Q-CHECKER V4 Version 1.11.2

Table of Contents

1. Q-CHECKER’s Functionality in General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 1.1 Structure Checks ................................................................................................. 13 1.2 Geometry Checks ................................................................................................ 13 1.3 Check Profiles .....................................................................................................14 1.4 Healing Functionality ..........................................................................................14 1.5 Check Reports ..................................................................................................... 15 1.6 Check Seal...........................................................................................................16 1.7 Pre-Processing .................................................................................................... 17 1.8 Grouping............................................................................................................. 18 1.9 Abort Condition .................................................................................................. 18 1.10 Error Analysis ...................................................................................................... 18 1.11 Database-Monitoring ..........................................................................................19

2. Modes of Operation and Program Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 2.1 Interactive Work Inside CATIA .............................................................................. 21 2.1.1 Starting Q-CHECKER ................................................................................................................. 21 2.1.2 Start Window ........................................................................................................................... 22 2.1.3 Q-CHECKER Analysis Window ..................................................................................................29 2.1.4 External Analysis Window ....................................................................................................... 38 2.1.4.1 Starting the External Analysis Window From Within Q-CHECKER .......................................... 38 2.1.4.2 Starting the External Analysis Window at the Prompt ...........................................................40 2.1.4.3 Layout of the External Analysis Window................................................................................. 41 2.2 Batch Operation ................................................................................................. 43 2.2.1 Starting Batch Operation From Within Q-Checker ................................................................44 2.2.2 Starting Batch Check Operation by Command Input .............................................................51 2.2.2.1 *.out and *.out.html Output Files—Batch-Run Survey........................................................ 54

3. Validation of External Check Seals .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

4. Criteria .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 4.1 Check-Profile Editor ............................................................................................61 4.2 Standard Parameters and Elements .................................................................... 66 4.3 Options .............................................................................................................. 72 4.3.1 Profile Settings......................................................................................................................... 72 4.3.2 Save Settings ........................................................................................................................... 73 4.3.3 Check Settings ......................................................................................................................... 74 4.3.4 Selection of Elements.............................................................................................................. 75 4.3.5 Model Type Default Element Selection .................................................................................. 77



4.3.6 Check Seal Validation .............................................................................................................. 78 4.3.7 Check Seal Creation................................................................................................................. 81 4.4 Batch Criteria ......................................................................................................83 4.4.1 Parameter for Batch Criteria.................................................................................................... 83 4.4.2 Catclean Category 1 ................................................................................................................. 85 4.4.3 Catclean Category 2.................................................................................................................86 4.4.4 Catclean Category 3 ................................................................................................................. 87 4.4.5 Solid Updateable .....................................................................................................................88 4.4.6 View not updated.....................................................................................................................89 4.5 Pre-Processing ................................................................................................... 90 4.5.1 Reframe the Current Screen................................................................................................... 90 4.5.2 Analyze Inertia of Solids.......................................................................................................... 91 4.5.3 Force Update of Solids ............................................................................................................ 91 4.5.4 Set Color Table ........................................................................................................................92 4.5.5 Layer-to-Layer Transferring of Element Types According to Firms Rules ............................. 93 4.5.6 Delete 3D Texts........................................................................................................................94 4.5.7 Set / Reset Ghost Attribute for Parents of Solids................................................................... 95 4.5.8 Publish Solids ..........................................................................................................................96 4.6 Internal Data Consistency .................................................................................. 97 4.6.1 Model Dimension....................................................................................................................97 4.6.2 Model Tolerances ....................................................................................................................98 4.6.3 Model Unit...............................................................................................................................99 4.6.4 Model Standards ...................................................................................................................100 4.6.5 Model Size ..............................................................................................................................101 4.6.6 Permitted Combinations of INDEX and DATA .................................................................... 102 4.6.7 Consistency of Patterns in Current PROJECT Environment ................................................ 103 4.6.8 Consistency of Dimensions and Texts in Current PROJECT Environment ......................... 105 4.6.9 Consistency of Attributes in Current PROJECT Environment.............................................. 106 4.7 Norms and Standards ....................................................................................... 107 4.7.1 Saved Model State................................................................................................................. 107 4.7.1.1 Non-allowed Last Modification Date of Document ............................................................. 107 4.7.1.2 Non Allowed CATIA Version and Release .............................................................................. 108 4.7.1.3 Identify Renumber ................................................................................................................. 109 4.7.1.4 Current Workspace Must be *MASTER.................................................................................110 4.7.1.5 Current Set.............................................................................................................................. 111 4.7.1.6 Current Axis System ...............................................................................................................112 4.7.1.7 Current Layer .......................................................................................................................... 113 4.7.1.8 Current Workspace Layer-Filter..............................................................................................114 4.7.1.9 Current Working Mode........................................................................................................... 115 4.7.1.10 Current Working Mode 2D or 3D...........................................................................................116 4.7.1.11 Current Graphic Display Mode of the Model ........................................................................ 117



4.7.1.12 Current Draft...........................................................................................................................118 4.7.1.13 Current View ...........................................................................................................................119 4.7.1.14 Current Screen....................................................................................................................... 120 4.7.1.15 Current Window Definition ....................................................................................................121 4.7.2 Texts........................................................................................................................................123 4.7.2.1 Selected Standard of TEXTD2 Standard ................................................................................123 4.7.2.2 Selected TEXTD2 Standard ................................................................................................... 124 4.7.2.3 Selected Standard of TEXTD2 Element Attributes ................................................................125 4.7.2.4 Selected TEXTD2 Element Attributes ................................................................................... 126 4.7.2.5 Existence and Content of Texts..............................................................................................127 4.7.2.6 IGES-Conform Texts.............................................................................................................. 128 4.7.3 Comments/Names................................................................................................................ 129 4.7.3.1 Model Comment ................................................................................................................... 129 4.7.3.2 Model Name.......................................................................................................................... 129 4.7.3.3 Element Name....................................................................................................................... 130 4.7.3.4 Solid Names Match Part Name.............................................................................................132 4.7.3.5 Window Name........................................................................................................................134 4.7.3.6 Screen Name .......................................................................................................................... 135 4.7.3.7 Filter Name............................................................................................................................ 136 4.7.3.8 Detail Name............................................................................................................................137 4.7.3.9 Symbol Name .........................................................................................................................138 4.7.3.10 Draft Name............................................................................................................................ 139 4.7.3.11 View Name............................................................................................................................. 140 4.7.3.12 View Name Must Match Draft Name....................................................................................141 4.7.3.13 Set Name ................................................................................................................................143 4.7.3.14 Axis Name.............................................................................................................................. 144 4.7.3.15 Law Name...............................................................................................................................145 4.7.3.16 Transformation Name........................................................................................................... 146 4.7.4 Workspaces............................................................................................................................ 148 4.7.4.1 Detail Used in Details............................................................................................................ 148 4.7.4.2 Unused Detail ........................................................................................................................ 148 4.7.4.3 Unused Symbol ..................................................................................................................... 149 4.7.4.4 Library Detail.......................................................................................................................... 150 4.7.4.5 Library Symbol ....................................................................................................................... 150 4.7.4.6 Compact / Standard Dittos.................................................................................................... 151 4.7.4.7 Compact / Standard Symbols ................................................................................................152 4.7.4.8 Identical Details...................................................................................................................... 153 4.7.4.9 Identical Symbols ...................................................................................................................154 4.7.5 Sets ......................................................................................................................................... 155 4.7.5.1 Set Must Exist in *MASTER Workspace ................................................................................ 155 4.7.5.2 Allowed Sets in *Master Workspace......................................................................................156 4.7.5.3 Empty Sets ..............................................................................................................................157 4.7.5.4 Only One Set in *Master Workspace.....................................................................................158 4.7.6 DRAFTs / VIEWs ....................................................................................................................159 4.7.6.1 Only One Draft .......................................................................................................................159 4.7.6.2 Only One View in Each Draft .................................................................................................159 4.7.6.3 View Must Exist on Every Draft ............................................................................................. 160



4.7.6.4 Copied View ............................................................................................................................161 4.7.6.5 Draft / View Must Exist ......................................................................................................... 162 4.7.6.6 Empty View Must Exist.......................................................................................................... 163 4.7.6.7 Empty Views .......................................................................................................................... 164 4.7.6.8 AUXVIEW Type Views.............................................................................................................165 4.7.6.9 Transparency Views............................................................................................................... 166 4.7.6.10 View Frames .......................................................................................................................... 167 4.7.6.11 Drawing Frame/Header as DITTO ....................................................................................... 168 4.7.6.12 Existence and Filling of Attributes Assigned to Ditto .......................................................... 170 4.7.6.13 Only One Axis in View ........................................................................................................... 174 4.7.6.14 View Scaling............................................................................................................................175 4.7.7 Elements ................................................................................................................................ 176 4.7.7.1 Conditional Feature Properties ............................................................................................. 176 4.7.7.2 Permitted Element Types in Model .......................................................................................177 4.7.7.3 Permitted Element Types in SHOW ..................................................................................... 179 4.7.7.4 Permitted Element Types in NOSHOW ................................................................................181 4.7.7.5 Logically Linked Elements (PARENTS) in SHOW................................................................ 182 4.7.7.6 Permitted Element Types in NOPICK....................................................................................183 4.7.7.7 Logically Linked Elements (PARENTS) in PICK ................................................................... 184 4.7.7.8 No Isolated Faces/Surfaces ...................................................................................................185 4.7.7.9 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area..........................................................................185 4.7.7.10 Axis System Must Exist in *MASTER Workspace................................................................. 186 4.7.7.11 No Unfixed Axis System .........................................................................................................187 4.7.7.12 Reverse Axis System.............................................................................................................. 188 4.7.7.13 Model Splitting SPACE/DRAW ............................................................................................. 188 4.7.7.14 User Geometric Elements ..................................................................................................... 189 4.7.7.15 Fake Dimensions................................................................................................................... 190 4.7.7.16 Isolated Dimension ................................................................................................................191 4.7.7.17 Identical 3D-Dittos................................................................................................................. 192 4.7.7.18 Identical 2D-Dittos ................................................................................................................ 193 4.7.7.19 Specific Attributes Not Applied to Element.......................................................................... 194 4.7.8 Solids ..................................................................................................................................... 196 4.7.8.1 Allowed Solid Primitives........................................................................................................ 196 4.7.8.2 Multi-Solid Part...................................................................................................................... 197 4.7.8.3 One Solid, at Least, in Part ................................................................................................... 198 4.7.8.4 Solid Update .......................................................................................................................... 199 4.7.8.5 Unsmart / Smart Solids ....................................................................................................... 200 4.7.8.6 Unused Primitives in Solid.................................................................................................... 201 4.7.8.7 Inactive Primitives in Solid....................................................................................................202 4.7.8.8 Unresolved Primitives in Solid.............................................................................................. 203 4.7.8.9 Missing Solid Construction History .....................................................................................204 4.7.8.10 Unused Solid Construction Geometry.................................................................................. 205 4.7.8.11 Shared Base Geometry in Solids...........................................................................................206 4.7.8.12 Imported Solids .....................................................................................................................206 4.7.9 Layers and Filters...................................................................................................................207 4.7.9.1 Permitted Element Types on Layers .....................................................................................207 4.7.9.2 Elements in SHOW on Layers................................................................................................211 4.7.9.3 Elements in NOSHOW on Layers..........................................................................................213



4.7.9.4 Logically Linked Elements (Parents) on Same Layer ............................................................215 4.7.9.5 Names of Filter and Its Visible Layers .................................................................................. 216 4.7.9.6 Filters Which Contain No Entity in Their Visible Layers .......................................................217 4.7.9.7 Layer-Filter on Views ............................................................................................................. 218 4.7.9.8 Layer-Filter on Dittos............................................................................................................. 219 4.7.10 Graphics.................................................................................................................................220 4.7.10.1 Selected Graphic Standard for DRAW Elements..................................................................220 4.7.10.2 Selected Graphic Standard for SPACE Elements ................................................................. 221 4.7.10.3 Selected Graphic Standard of Surfaces ................................................................................ 222 4.7.10.4 Selected Graphic Standard for Faces.................................................................................... 223 4.7.10.5 Selected Graphic Standard of Solids ....................................................................................224 4.7.10.6 Selected Graphic Attributes of Surfaces ............................................................................... 225 4.7.10.7 Selected Graphic Attributes of Faces.................................................................................... 227 4.7.10.8 Selected Graphic Attributes of Solids ................................................................................... 228 4.7.10.9 Selected Graphic Attributes of Volumes............................................................................... 230 4.7.10.10 Selected Graphic Attributes of Skins .................................................................................... 232 4.7.10.11 Element Color Not NONE .................................................................................................... 234 4.7.10.12 Color Mode by Set/Layer/Type/View.................................................................................... 236 4.7.10.13 Empty Shapes ........................................................................................................................ 238 4.8 Geometry ..........................................................................................................239 4.8.1 Curves .................................................................................................................................... 239 4.8.1.1 Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG].................................................. 239 4.8.1.2 Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT].............................................240 4.8.1.3 Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS]............................................. 241 4.8.1.4 Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI]..............................................................................................................242 4.8.1.5 Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI] .............................................................................................. 243 4.8.1.6 Embedded Curves and Points [G-CU-EM]............................................................................244 4.8.1.7 Wavy Planar Curve [G-CU-WV].............................................................................................. 245 4.8.1.8 Self-Intersecting Curve [G-CU-IS]..........................................................................................246 4.8.1.9 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK] ........................................................................ 247 4.8.1.10 High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD].............................................................................................248 4.8.1.11 Small Curve Radius of Curvature [G-CU-CR] ........................................................................249 4.8.1.12 Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG] ............................................................................................... 250 4.8.1.13 Linear Curves with Polynomial Degree greater than 1 [G-CU-ID] .........................................251 4.8.2 Surfaces ................................................................................................................................. 252 4.8.2.1 Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG] ............................................... 252 4.8.2.2 Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NT] ...........................................253 4.8.2.3 Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NS] .......................................... 254 4.8.2.4 Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI] ............................................................................................................255 4.8.2.5 Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]................................................................... 256 4.8.2.6 Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM] ............................................................................................ 257 4.8.2.7 Small Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]...................................................................... 259 4.8.2.8 Big Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]..........................................................................260 4.8.2.9 Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV]....................................................................................................... 261 4.8.2.10 Folded Surface [G-SU-FO] .....................................................................................................262 4.8.2.11 Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC].............................................................264 4.8.2.12 Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP]..................................................................266



4.8.2.13 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface [G-SU-IK] ...................................................................... 267 4.8.2.14 High-Degree Surface [G-SU-HD] ..........................................................................................268 4.8.2.15 Non-Uniform Polynomial Degree of Patches in Surface [G-SU-xx] .....................................269 4.8.2.16 Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG] ............................................................................................270 4.8.2.17 Unused Surface Segment Rows [G-SU-UN] ..........................................................................271 4.8.2.18 Undefined Surface Normal [G-SU-xx] ................................................................................... 272 4.8.2.19 High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface [G-SU-xx] ............................................ 274 4.8.2.20 Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 [G-SU-ID]..................................... 275 4.8.2.21 Multi-Face Surface [G-SU-MU].............................................................................................. 276 4.8.3 Face Edges ............................................................................................................................. 277 4.8.3.1 Large Face Edge Segment Gap [G-ED-LG] ........................................................................... 277 4.8.3.2 Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI]....................................................................................................... 278 4.8.3.3 Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI] .......................................................................................279 4.8.3.4 Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG] ........................................................................................280 4.8.3.5 Closed Face Edge [G-ED-CL] ................................................................................................. 281 4.8.4 Face Loops............................................................................................................................. 282 4.8.4.1 Large Face Edge Gap [G-LO-LG] ........................................................................................... 282 4.8.4.2 Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA] ........................................................................................ 283 4.8.4.3 Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]....................................................................284 4.8.4.4 Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT] ....................................................... 285 4.8.5 Faces ......................................................................................................................................286 4.8.5.1 Tiny Face [G-FA-TI] ................................................................................................................286 4.8.5.2 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN] ........................................................................................ 287 4.8.5.3 Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM] ................................................................................................. 288 4.8.5.4 Large Face Edge to Surface Gap [G-FA-EG]..........................................................................289 4.8.5.5 Closed Face [G-FA-CL]...........................................................................................................290 4.8.6 Shells/Volumes......................................................................................................................292 4.8.6.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx] .............................................................................292 4.8.6.2 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR] ................................................................... 293 4.8.6.3 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG] ................................................................... 295 4.8.6.4 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT] ..............................................................296 4.8.6.5 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS] .............................................................. 297 4.8.6.6 Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA] .................................................................................................299 4.8.6.7 Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell/Volume [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]..............................300 4.8.6.8 Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM]................................................................................................. 301 4.8.6.9 Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS] ............................................................. 303 4.8.6.9.1 Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]................................................................................................304 4.8.7 Solid/SKD .............................................................................................................................. 305 4.8.7.1 Surfaces ................................................................................................................................. 305 4.8.7.1.1 Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SU-LG]......................... 305 4.8.7.1.2 Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1-Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NT]....................306 4.8.7.1.3 Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2-Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NS] .................... 307 4.8.7.1.4 Tiny Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-TI]..................................................................................... 308 4.8.7.1.5 Narrow Surface Segment in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN] ............................................ 310 4.8.7.1.6 Embedded Surfaces in Solid/SKD [G-SU-EM]....................................................................... 311 4.8.7.1.7 Small Surface Radius of Curvature in Solid/SKD [G-SU-CR] ................................................312 4.8.7.1.8 Wavy Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-WV].................................................................................. 313 4.8.7.1.9 Folded Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-FO]................................................................................314



4.8.7.1.10 Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary in Solid/SKD [G-SU-DC] ...................................... 316 4.8.7.1.11 Degenerate Surface Segment Corner in Solid/SKD [G-SU-DP] ........................................... 319 4.8.7.1.12 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-IK]................................................ 320 4.8.7.1.13 High-Degree Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-HD] .....................................................................321 4.8.7.1.14 Fragmented Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-FG] ...................................................................... 322 4.8.7.1.15 Unused Surface Segment Rows in Solid/SKD [G-SU-UN]....................................................323 4.8.7.1.16 Undefined Surface Normal in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx] ............................................................. 324 4.8.7.1.17 High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx] ...................... 326 4.8.7.1.18 Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 in Solid/SKD [G-SU-ID] .............. 327 4.8.7.2 Face Edges ............................................................................................................................. 328 4.8.7.2.1 Large Face Edge Segment Gap in Solid/SKD [G-ED-LG] ..................................................... 328 4.8.7.2.2 Tiny Face Edge in Solid/SKD [G-ED-TI] ................................................................................ 329 4.8.7.2.3 Tiny Face Edge Segment in Solid/SKD [G-ED-TI]................................................................. 330 4.8.7.2.4 Fragmented Face Edge in Solid/SKD [G-ED-FG]................................................................... 331 4.8.7.3 Face Loops..............................................................................................................................332 4.8.7.3.1 Large Face Edge Gap in Solid/SKD [G-LO-LG]......................................................................332 4.8.7.3.2 Sharp Face Edge Angle in Solid/SKD [G-LO-SA] ...................................................................333 4.8.7.3.3 Self-Intersecting Face Loop in Solid/SKD [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS] ............................................. 334 4.8.7.3.4 Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop in Solid/SKD [G-LO-IT] ..................................335 4.8.7.4 Faces ...................................................................................................................................... 336 4.8.7.4.1 Tiny Face in Solid/SKD [G-FA-TI] .......................................................................................... 336 4.8.7.4.2 Narrow Face in Solid/SKD [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]...................................................................337 4.8.7.4.3 Embedded Faces in Solid/SKD [G-FA-EM] ............................................................................338 4.8.7.4.4 Large Face Edge to Surface Gap in Solid/SKD [G-FA-EG] ................................................... 339 4.8.7.5 Shells/Volumes......................................................................................................................340 4.8.7.5.1 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume in Solid/SKD [G-SH-FR] .............................................340 4.8.7.5.2 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SH-LG]..............................................341 4.8.7.5.3 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NT] ........................................ 342 4.8.7.5.4 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NS] ........................................ 343 4.8.7.5.5 Sharp Face Angle in Solid/SKD [G-SH-SA]........................................................................... 345 4.8.7.5.6 Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell/Volume in Solid/SKD [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT] ....... 346 4.8.7.5.7 Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS] ............................................................. 347 4.8.7.5.8 Over-Used Edge in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NM]........................................................................... 347 4.8.7.5.9 Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]................................................................................................ 348 4.8.7.6 General................................................................................................................................... 349 4.8.7.6.1 Multi-Volume Solid [G-SO-MU] ............................................................................................ 349 4.8.7.6.2 Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI]............................................................................................................... 350 4.8.7.6.3 Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM].................................................................................................352 4.8.7.6.4 Solid Void [G-SO-VO] ............................................................................................................ 354 4.8.8 Drawing................................................................................................................................... 355 4.8.8.1 Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI]...........................................................................................355 4.8.8.2 Tiny Drawing Element Segment [G-DW-TI] .......................................................................... 356 4.8.8.3 Embedded Drawing Elements [G-DW-EM]............................................................................357 4.8.8.4 High-Degree Drawing Element [G-DW-HD]..........................................................................358 4.9 Plugins .............................................................................................................. 359

5. Online-Help .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360

6. Administration.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 6.1 Element Selection ............................................................................................. 361



6.2 Element Groups ................................................................................................362 6.3 QCHECKER.par—General Q-CHECKER Settings .................................................. 363 6.4 CRITERIA.par and TCACriterionTable.exe—Criteria Management ......................368 6.5 PROFILE.par—Model Assessment..................................................................... 377 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles ..................................... 379 6.6.1 Model type identification by model name .............................................................................383 6.6.2 Model type identification by file comment ............................................................................383 6.6.3 Model type identification by element type.............................................................................383 6.6.4 Model type identification by layer (ON_LAYER)................................................................. 384 6.6.5 Model type recognition by model dimension....................................................................... 384 6.6.6 Model type identification by strings in a UDB ......................................................................385 6.7 TEMPLATE.html—HTML Check Report Template ..............................................386 6.8 TEMPLATE.txt—Text Check Report Template .................................................... 387 6.9 QCHECKER.usr—User Settings ......................................................................... 388 6.10 <COLORTABLENAME>.color—Color Table .......................................................389 6.11 <FILTERLIST>.filter—Filter List ........................................................................ 390 6.12 ASSIGN.layer—Layer-to-Layer Transferring of Element Types According to

Firms Rules ....................................................................................................... 391 6.13 <TESTPROFILENAME>.qcprofile—Check Profile Settings..................................392 6.14 <PROJECTNAME>.prj—Comparison of the Project Environment ....................... 393 6.15 <File-COMMENTNAME>.comment—Content of the File Comment ................... 395

Addendum A—Wildcards and General Regular Expressions .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396

Addendum B—Overview: Old and New Names of the Geometrical Check Criteria .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406

* * *

1 . Q - C H E C K E R ’ S F U N C T I O N A L I T Y I N G E N E R A L


1. Q-CHECKER’s Functionality in General

CAD data is under constant change throughout its lifecycle. The data passes from different suppliers to the upstream users, it is processed in different departments, and the data’s lifecycle comprises different processing stages as are draft, modification, release. The aim of t he T o t a l Da t a Q ua l i t y M anage me nt is to monitor and control the quality of the CAD data throughout this entire process. It must be ensured, that error data is identified as early as possible in order to avoid that the development process is retarded by persisting errors, error search and error recovery, and to ensure that error data is not transferred in upstream processing stages or in the manufacturing.

Q-CHECKER offers a large amount of facilities to check CAT data quality according to the latest international data quality guidelines. A total of 242 check criteria allows to inspect as well the structure of CATIA-model files as the geometrical data quality of the models them-selves.

For detailed information about the criteria, please, see chapter 4. Criteria on page 61.

The use of Q-CHECKER is possible in two ways:

• checking a single model interactively inside CATIA, and

• checking several models in batch operation.

Q-CHECKER is equipped with features and with different instruments that allow structuring the check, what facilitates the work considerably and helps to save time:

• Many of the check items predefined in form of c heck c r i t e r i a have their op t ions , pa ramete rs , to l e rances to define exactly and to vary the checks. For every crite-rion, the administrator can determine an ind i v idua l e r ro r we igh t according to the company’s needs.

• In c h e c k p r o f i l e s specific series of individual checks can be predefined.

• The executing order of the individual checks in a check profile can be organized by assigning the check criteria to p ro c e ss ing g roups .

• It is possible to attribute to a criterion, which has an especially great importance for the model quality, the in t e r rup t io n c o nd i t io n . This will allow, when such a criterion is found not fulfilled, to stop the check job and to save the time of further useless check operation.

Q-CHECKER gives the administrator flexibility in adaptation to firm’s specific requirements:



• With Q-CHECKER the XML-Editor TCACriterionTable.exe is delivered that allows to adapt flexibly the Q-CHECKER check criteria—they can be cloned (i. e. used repeatedly in several instances each with different settings), moved to other tab cards, renamed or even switched off so that they will be no more visible in the check-profile editor. (For details see chapter 6.4 CRITERIA.par and TCACriterionTable.exe—Criteria Management on page 368).

• Buttons by the administrator can be hidden from the Q-Checker graphic user interface in order to prevent undesirable setting modifications by users.

Also for the further processing of the models checked, Q-CHECKER offers features that ensure the user efficient and time saving work:

• For many of the criteria a he a l ing functionality is predefined. Errors can be corrected in the interactive mode by mouse click, or automatically during the check job—in comparison with the manual correction the user can save time and avoid new errors.

• As a result of the check, for a detailed model evaluation a r e p o r t is written with all errors indicated. The errors can be visualized on the CATIA model, which therefore is zoomed to a size appropriated to view the error element.

• A Q-CHECKER independent viewer is provided enabling the user to access the check report also when Q-CHECKER is not active, e. g. when working on the model in CATIA.

• Check seals generated as a result of the check as well as the check seal validation option provide the down stream user the certitude to have to deal with a faultless high-quality model. This allows to avoid useless rechecking.

In the following paragraphs of chapter 1 Q-CHECKER’s functionality and opportunities will be described in detail.

Q-CHECKER add-on—Q-MONITOR

To increase the functionality of Q-CHECKER, a Q-CHECKER add-on is available— Q-MONITOR.

Q-MONITOR is a tool conceived to achieve monitoring of the results of Q-CHECKER’s check jobs. Q-MONITOR performs a statistical analysis of the check results and visualizes them in an easy-to-grasp table or chart form. The number of the check jobs, included in the moni-toring, is user-defined. The module DATABASE CONNECT, which is part of Q-MONITOR, ensures the transfer of the check result data from Q-CHECKER into a database, from where they are taken for the monitoring by Q-MONITOR .



1.1 Structure Checks

Q-CHECKER’s structure checks are destined to examine the structural part of CATIA models. The models are examined on non-geometrical properties as naming conventions, geometric elements allowed or not allowed etc. For many of the criteria, in case of their violation an automatic healing is possible.

The structure checks enable the user to verify the compliance of the models with firm’s regulations. Depending on the used check profile, the user can check the firm’s own models or incoming models from suppliers on their compliance with the in-house regula-tions, or can check outgoing models on their compliance with the customer’s regulations.

1.2 Geometry Checks

Geometry Checks allow to control CATIA-Model on their compliance with international standards for geometrical data quality, especially with VDA Recommendation 4955 Version 2. Q-CHECKER’s conformity with the VDA 4955/2 recommendations is certificated starting from version 1.3.1 for CATIA V4. Compliance with these standards is a precondition for smooth data exchange in the industry. Other standards, such as SASIG, JAMA, ODETTE or PDQ, have already been integrated, or can easily be integrated on customer demand.

In detail, the Q-CHECKER provides geometric criteria to check the following geometric elements:

• drafting geometries (lines and curves),

• wireframe geometries (lines and curves),

• surfaces,

• faces,

• topologies (skins, volumes), and

• solids/SKD.

The elements can be checked on features as e. g.:

• mini-elements,

• identical elements,

• continuities

• waviness, or

• polynomial degree.



1.3 Check Profiles

A check profile is a bundle of individual check definitions. With check profiles, it is pos-sible to predefine different check series for special purposes (e. g. checking specific products, checking incoming CAD data from suppliers or CAD data to be transferred to certain OEMs). Instead of defining for every new check job again and again all the indi-vidual check operations, it is enough to select in the start window (when checking one only model) or in the Batch Settings window (when checking several models) the appro-priate predefined check profile.

Check profiles are saved in files with the *.qcprofile name extension.

Check profiles fall into two different types:

• S t and ard p ro f i l e s—centrally prescribed check profiles that can not be changed by the individual user.

• Use r p ro f i l e s—specific check profiles that are defined by the individual user accord-ing to his needs and that are available only for this individual user.

For further information see 2.1.1 Starting / paragraph “Profile list box“ on page 27.

1.4 Healing Functionality

The healing functionality can correct detected errors for most of the criteria. This option, when available for the particular criterion, displays the reason for the failure along with a suggested solution.



1.5 Check Reports

For every check, executed by Q-CHECKER, a check report is written. The reports by default are stored in the user’s home directory (or in other directory, defined by the administrator).

Format Properties and Purposes of the Report’s Use

*.qcreport Is generated always. Required for Q-CHECKER-internal purposes, not destined to be browsed by the user. Base for the report edited in the Q-CHECKER analysis window (see chapter 2.1.3 Q-CHECKER Analysis Window on page 29).

*.html *.txt

Are generated if activated in the QCHECKER.par file. Destined for browsing the check report by the user in an HMTL or text editor.

*.xml Is generated if activated in the QCHECKER.par file, but only if Q-CHECKER with database connection is used. Allows to store the check result in a database.

*.stdreport Is generated if activated in the QCHECKER.par file. VDA4955/Odette standard report format The structure of the Report files facilitates the information search in these files; the use of keyword provides the possibility of an automatic analysis of the report.

*.out and *.out.html

These files are generated only for the batch run—output files with the survey of the batch run. For details see chapter 2.2.2.1 * .out and *.out .html Output F i les—Batch-Run Survey on page 54.

The HTML and TXT reports give a complete overview of the executed check and contain in detail:

• CATIA version with release and service pack numbers

• Q-CHECKER version number

• the name(s) of the checked model(s)

• the name of the model directory, in which the checked model(s) is/are stored

• the cumulated error weight (The weight of every individual error is to be determined by the administrator.)

• the check date

• the used check profile

• the status of the healing option (on or off )

• the list of the error weights and priorities (which are to be predefined by the system administrator in a parameter file)

• the error listing, sorted by criteria names



• the error listing, sorted by element names, with or without the name(s) of the criterion/criteria that have been violated

• the listing of general errors.

The check reports are generated in the language that has been selected for the Q-CHECKER

user interface. Once a check report has been generated, its language will not be changed when selecting an other language for the Q-CHECKER user interface.

See also chapter 6.7 TEMPLATE.html—HTML Check Report Template on page 386 and 6.8 TEMPLATE.txt—Text Check Report Template on page 387.

1.6 Check Seal

When receiving a model from a supplier, the user up to now could not have certitude whether quality standards have been observed, so that there was the need to check incoming models in every case. Q-CHECKER provides a remedy to this unsatisfactory situation, offering two options—one for creating check seals, another for validation, i. e. checking models on the existence of a check seal and its validity.

The Check Seal Validation option is provided to check models on the existence of check seals and their validity. Checking check seals is time saving in comparison with checking complete models, because models already checked will not be completely rechecked —the check is restricted to the check seal. The validation of internal check seals is executed by Q-CHECKER, external check seals are validated by the means of the program qc_seal_val. To validate a check seal, check sums stored in the check seal are compared with the actual state of the model.

Check seal verification can be used company-internally (to check company-own models presumed to have been checked by Q-CHECKER) as well as to control incoming models from suppliers that are obligated to deliver models checked by Q-CHECKER.

Q-CHECKER allows creating different check seals—internal check seals, situated inside of the model, as well as an external check seal in the form of an XML file. The check seals contain check sums for the model, the check profile and (in the case of an external check seal) for the check seal itself.

Whether check seals will be created at all, and which ones, depends primarily on the settings in the QCHECKER.par configuration file. But furthermore the Check Seal Creation option allows the user to make his own settings and thus change the settings in the configuration file QCHECKER.par by the means of the check profile.



Comparison Internal—External Check Seals

Internal Check Seal External Check Seal

• Location File Comment or UDB <name>.qcseal XML-file • Relation

Model—Check Seal

The check seal is situated in the model, and hence has direct relation to the model.

The check seal is not situated in the model

• Reliability D i s a d v a n t a g e : The validation is not 100% reliable, because only limited information in the model can be checked on changes (e. g. quantity of elements per element type).

A d v a n t a g e : The validation is 100% reliable, because a check sum can be generated for whole the model.

• Danger of manipulation of the model

D i s a d v a n t a g e : As the model must be saved after checking (otherwise the check seal will be lost), and hence gets a new modification date), the date of the last check is always older then the date of the last modification of the model.

A d v a n t a g e : It is possible to specify in the Options of the check profile that the check procedure, the save procedure and the generation of the check seal must be executed immediately one after the other. This ensures that no manipulation on the model can be made before generating the check seal.

• Validation The check seal can be validated directly by Q-CHECKER by the means of special options.

The check seal is validated by the means of an additional program (qc_seal_val delivered with Q-CHECKER).

• Check seal settings

For the internal as well as for the external check seal the settings can be specified in both the following ways: • in the QCHECKER.par file • using the Q-CHECKER graphical user interface (tab card Options—Check

Seal Creat ion and Check Seal Val idat ion subfolders).

For detailed information about check seals see chapters

• Settings for check seal creation—4.3.7 Check Seal Creation on page 81 and chapter 6.3 QCHECKER.par—General Q-Checker Settings on page 363;

• validation of the internal check seal—chapter 4.3.6 Check Seal Validation on page 78;

• validation of the external check seal—chapter 3. Validation of External Check Seals on page 59.

1.7 Pre-Processing

Whenever companies are exchanging data, the direct inspection of model structure would inevitably lead to error messages, as different companies use different standards. Model standards can be converted to comply with the company specific guidelines, before the actual check run.



1.8 Grouping

Every criterion can be assigned to a processing group. The aim of the processing groups’ use is to create an order in which the criteria are to be checked. The check operation (and the possible healing) is executed group by group in the order of the group numbers. A processing group with a higher number is processed only after processing of lower number groups is accomplished.

A reasonable check order helps to save time. Criteria of general importance should be checked at the beginning. This will allow to stop the check run in case a fault element is found. For that reason, it is not advisable to assign important criteria to the last process-ing group. Criteria, the healing of which causes substantial changes on the model, also are to be checked and healed at the beginning.

1.9 Abort Condition

In the case of certain criteria an error can be so serious that one only error causes the model to become unemployable. Such criteria that are of special importance for the model quality can be designated as abort criteria.

If, in a check run, such a criterion is found violated, the check run will be aborted imme-diately or after the check of the respective processing group is accomplished. The criteria not yet checked in this case remain unchecked, thus checking time can be saved.

1.10 Error Analysis

The elements that, in the result of the check, have been found faulty, with the facilities of Q-CHECKER can be analyzed in detail on their errors. Among others, these are the error listing and the auxiliary graphic information. The error listing can be sorted according either to the criteria or to the elements (which criteria have been violated by which elements or which elements violate which criteria). The auxiliary graphic information (point, lines, numerical values etc.) helps the user to find the error element in the model and to analyze it. For a subsequent touch up the graphic help information can be integrated in the model permanently.



Color symbols, which can be pre-defined by the system administrator, in conjunction with the error weight, different display options etc. facilitate to estimate the quality of the model. The color symbols (e.g. yellow for an error or dark red for a K.O.–criterion) let recognize at a glance how many errors are in the model and what is their weight. Beyond that, Q-CHECKER provides a tool to make an element, selected in the error listing, visible on the screen— it will be displayed in the CATIA model highlighted and zoomed to an extent, filling the CATIA screen.

For a more detailed description see chapter 2.1.3 Q-Checker Analysis Window on page 29.

1.11 Database-Monitoring

With the Database Connect module, the check results can be stored in a SQL-data base (Oracle, DB2, etc.) what will allow their further processing and statistical analysis.

The database contains t h re e t ab l e s , in which the check results are stored.

The table CHECK_SESSION contains general data of the check run, for instance:

qchecker.db

qchecker.in

Q-Checker JAVA /JDBC SQL -

DB

report.xml

QC_DB

DB-CONNECT



• the name of the checked model

• the name of the model directory, where the model is stored

• the model assessment and the cumulated error weight

• information about the Q-CHECKER version used

• the check run date

• the check profile used.

The table CHECK_CRITERION contains the results for every checked criterion, for instance:

• the name of the criterion

• the priority of the criterion

• the check status

• the number of errors

• the cumulated weight of the errors of the respective criterion

• the healing status

• the number of the healed errors.

The table QC_CRITERION_INFO contains the criteria names in two languages:

• in German

• in English.

For further information, please refer to the DB-Creator and Q-Monitor documentation.

2 . M O D E S O F O P E R A T I O N A N D P R O G R A M S T A R T


2. Modes of Operation and Program Start

There are two different ways of using Q-CHECKER

• interactively in CATIA—see chapter 2.1,

• as a batch operation—see chapter 2.2 on page 43.

In these chapters, it will be given a detailed description on how to start these modes and how to use them.

2.1 Interactive Work Inside CATIA

2.1.1 Starting Q-CHECKER

Q-CHECKER from within CATIA can be started:

• by using the menu item Q-Checker in the TransCAT-Tools menu (see q on the screenshot below; the menu names can be different, depending on the administrator’s settings),

• or by entering the IUA command „/m qchecker“ at the prompt.

q w

q Start Q-CHECKER from CATIA menu

w For explications see: “Alternative” under Delete Auxil iary Graphic Help Information button on page 32.



2.1.2 Start Window

When Q-CHECKER is started, the start window is opened which you can see below.

q w e r t y u i o

a

s

d

f j

g k

h l

The Start window contains the buttons, boxes and other elements that allow to make the general specifications for checks of individual models and to start an individual-model check job. Their function will be described in the following. When the cursor is positioned over a button, a brief description (Quick-Tip) is shown.

(For the batch-check job start see chapter 2.2.2 Starting Batch on p. 51.)

NOTE:

The buttons described in the following text are not in every case available for the user—they can be switched off (hid-den) by the administrator in order to exclude some functions to be used. (Details see chapter 6.3 QCHECKER.par—General Q-Checker Settings on page 363.)



Description of the window’s elements:

q

Q-Checker Run With Healing button

The check run is executed according to the predefined settings of the check profile. When faulty elements are found, a correction is performed automatically if a healing option for the respective criterion is available and the healing option is activated.

The check result will be displayed in the Q-Checker Analysis Window, which is opened after the check run (see chapter 29 on page 2.1.3).

w

Q-Checker Run Without Healing button

The check run is executed according to the pre-defined criteria, but the faulty elements are not corrected.

The check result will be displayed in the Q-Checker Analysis Window, which is opened after the check run (see chapter 29 on page 2.1.3).

e

Prepare Batch Run

When this button is clicked, a window will be opened, where the batch run can be prepared and started. For further information see chapter Kapitel 2.2 Batch Operation auf Seite 43.

r

Selection of individual elements button

When this button is clicked, the Selection window will be opened. With the radio button in this window you can choose one of the two selection modes

• Add

• Delete.

For the selection of elements there are two modes:

• Manual selection of in d i v idua l e l ements . Press the Manual Selection button. The CATIA window will be opened. Select there the elements. Complete the selection with the command YES: END.

• Selection of e l ement g roups by entering multi-select strings in the text box of the Selection window.

ATTENTION:

Complete entering the multi-select strings by pressing the ENTER button.



Function of the buttons in the Selection window

Manual Selection button

When this button is clicked, the CATIA window is opened. The user can select there elements.

Close window, using selection for next check run

When this button ic clicked, the selection will be applied. In the Q-CHECKER start window, the manual selection is signaled by the hand symbols on both Q-CHECKER run buttons q and w.

Clear selection button

Abort the previously made selection; the dialog window remains opened to allow a new selection.

Close dialog window, not using selection for next check run button

The previously made selection is discarded or paused, the dialog window is closed.

Depending on the administrator’s settings in the QCHECKER.par file, the selection will be saved in CATIA or discarded. If the setting is on saving, the selection can be interrupted, e. g. to modify parameters of the check criteria. Thereafter, the individual checking can be started with the previously made selection.

t

Edit Q-CHECKER Options button

When this button is clicked, a dialog is opened, where user-specific settings can be made:

• On the General tab card the following settings can be made:

5=! Language for the Q-CHECKER graphical user interface (German, English, Japanese)

5=@ Creation of the CATIA identifiers in the model. The default setting is no creation of CATIA identifiers.

5=!

5=@



ATTENTION:

The language settings take effect only after Q-CHECKER restart.

• On the Font tab card, the cha rac te r f on t fo r the Q-CHECKER WINDOWS and i t s a t t r i bu tes can be selected.

• On the Others tab card confirmation windows can be deactivated or

activated.

5=! 5=@

5=# 5=$ 5=% 5=^

5=&

Check boxes for confirmation dialog boxes

If the confirmation dialog boxes are deactivated, the respective processes are started immediately using the option most recently selected and with no request for confirmation.

5=! If this option is deactivated, after pressing the 34 button in the Analysis Window (see page Activate Catia) CATIA will be started immediately—no request for confirmation will be dis-played before.

5=@ If this option is deactivated, after pressing the Healing button in the Analysis Window (see page 34) the automatic healing will be started immediately—no query for confirma-tion will be displayed before.

5=# If this option is deactivated, after pressing the Mark Vio-lated Entit ies button in the Analysis Window (see page 32) all faulty elements will be marked immediately—no request for confirmation will be displayed before.



5=$ If this option is deactivated, after pressing the Create per-manent auxil iary information for al l error elements button in the Analysis Window (see page 31) immediately the temporary auxiliary graphic help information of all elements is made permanent—no request for confirmation will be dis-played before.

5=% If this option is deactivated, before generating the check seal the model will be saved immediately—with no request for confirmation (for details see chapter 4.3.2 Save Settings on page 73).

5=^ When generating an XML check report for a model, different options are available. The selection can be made in a confirmation dialog box (for details see chapter 2.1.4.1. Starting the External Ana-lysis Window From Within Q-Checker on page 38). If the current option 4=^ is deactivated, the option that has been selected in the confirmation dialog box last will be executed immediately—with no possibility of modification or canceling.

If you want the confirmation dialog boxes to be displayed again, the respective options must be reactivated.

5=& GUI-behavior check box

If this check box is activated, the active Q-CHECKER window will be always kept in the foreground.

y

Q-CHECKER Help button

When this button is clicked, a PDF file with the user manual is opened. Individual topics can be selected using index.

(Pre-requisite: ADOBE ACROBAT READER must be installed.)

u

PDQ Help button

When this button is clicked, a viewer or browser for HTML, PDF, text or other file is opened to display a company specific product data quality guideline.

What exactly will be opened, when the button is pressed, depends on the specifications in the Q-CHECKER script (qcheckerV4).

i

Q-CHECKER Information button

When this button is clicked, a panel will be opened, indicating the Q-CHECKER release number.

o

Exit Q-CHECKER button

When this button is clicked, Q-CHECKER is exited, you will return to CATIA.



a Model f i le

Here the model directory is displayed, where the model selected for check is in.

s Model

Here the name of the model is displayed, that is selected to be checked.

d Environment l ist box

Here the environment can be selected that contains the check profiles of a contractor/OEM (cf. f).

f Profi le l ist box

Select in the list a pre-defined check profile.

Which check profiles are contained in the list depends on the environment selected in the Environment list box.

When the list box is opened, t w o lists are edited:

• The uppe r list contains the s t anda rd check p ro f i l e s (centrally prescribed check profiles that can not be changed by the individual user).

• The l o w e r l ist contains the u s e r d e f i n e d c h e c k p r o f i l e s (specific check profiles defined by the individual user according to his needs, available only for this individual user).

(For conversion of check profiles sea chapter 6.9 QCHECKER.usr on page 388.)

Check profiles can be e rase d directly in the Check Profi le list box. By right-mouse-button clicking in this list box a context-sensitive menu is opened with different delete commands.

The Nothing c h e c k p r o f i l e is an e m p t y profile delivered with Q-CHECKER (i. e. a profile with no criterion activated). This check profile is required to ensure the func-tion of Q-CHECKER, when no user or standard check profile has been created yet (if Q-CHECKER is started with no check profile existing, an error will be displayed).



The Nothing check profile can be used as so urc e f i l e to create user-specific check profiles.

gh

Report combo box/ Use Model Name as Report Name check box

The Report combo box can be used for the following purposes:

(1) S e l e c t a n e x i s t i n g c h e c k r e p o r t to open it for viewing with one of the buttons k, l or overwrite it with the results of a new check.

(2) Or: Enter a name for a new check report.

When the check box h is activated, a check report will be created that has the same name as the model has.

Check reports can be e rase d directly in the Report combo box. By right-mouse-button clicking in this combo box a context-sensitive menu is opened with different delete commands.

j

Edit Profi le button

When this button is clicked, the Modify Profi le window with all check criteria will be opened (see 4.1 Check-Profi le Editor on page 61).

The criteria and their parameters will be explained in the subchapters of chapter 4. Criteria.

The standard elements that are used in many criteria are described in chapter 4.2 Standard Parameters and Elements on page 66.

k

Display Report button

When this button is clicked, the Q-Checker Analysis Window with a check report is opened (see chapter 2.1.3 on page 29). The report contains the model assessment.

The report to be opened can be selected in the Report list box. The default setting activates the report of the last check run.

NOTE:

If for browsing in the analysis window an o t he r check report is selected than that for the currently opened model, in the top line of analysis window a hint is edited that there is no c o r re sp o nd e nc e between the model opened and the check report.



l

Show HTML Report button

When this button is clicked, a check report in HT M L format with the model assessment is opened.

The report to be opened can be selected in the Report list box d. By default the name of the report of the last check run is pre-selected.

2.1.3 Q-CHECKER Analysis Window

q

w er t to 1( 2) 2!

2@

2#

2$

2%

2^ 2&

When the check run is accomplished, automatically the analysis window is opened. In this window, the d e t a i l e d c h e c k r e s u l t s are displayed. The error listing with color

e r

2!

2@



symbols help the user to get at a glance an overview of the errors and their category (e. g. yellow symbol for “error”, red symbol for “major defect“ or “K.O. criterion“). The window provides different f ac i l i t i e s fo r de ta i l ed e xamina t ion of the error elements.

NOTE:

The buttons described in the following text are not in every case available for the user—they can be switched off (hid-den) by the administrator in order to exclude some functions to be used. (Details see chapter 6.3 QCHECKER.par—General Q-Checker Settings on page 363.)

q Model Assessment box

General check result: General assessment (in the example: KO) and total error sum of the model

w Check Profi le box

The name of the check profile used is displayed.

e Sort by l ist box

The faulty elements can be displayed sorted:

• either by the criteria (which criteria are not fulfilled by which elements?)

• or by the elements (which elements have errors of which criteria?).

r Show list box

The element displaying can be controlled by selecting one of the following filter options:

• all – Display all criteria.

• called – Display only criteria that have been checked by the check profile.

• correct – Display only criteria that have not been violated.

• healed – Display only criteria that have healed elements.

• violated – Display only criteria that have error elements.

• general error – Display only criteria that have elements causing a general error.



General errors occur in case of a principal analysis impossibility. The reasons of the most common general errors are the following:

• A batch check run is started for an unsave d model file;

• a solid n o t u p d a t e d is to be checked on cavities.

t

Zoom toggle switch

If this toggle switch is pressed, the selected error element is brought into the focus of the CATIA window and is normally highlighted.

y

Graphic Fine Analysis toggle switch

If this switch is pressed, for some violated criteria additional graphic information (e.g. text, arrows) is displayed, that facilitates to recognize the error entity and its features. These graphic marks are temporary, they disappear when the toggle switch is released or an other element is selected.

u

Create permanent auxil iary information for the current element

If this button is pressed, the auxiliary graphic help information for the current element, generated by pressing the Graphic Fine Analysis button, is made permanent.

NOTE:

• This button is ac t i ve o n l y if the Graphic Fine Analysis toggle switch is in ON position.

• Auxiliary graphic help information can no t be generated for every cr i t e r io n .

• If not an element, but a criterion is selected, clicking this button will result auxiliary elements for all error elements of this criterion. (Example to use this facility: Marking all turn-down of normals.)

i

Create permanent auxil iary information for al l error elements

If this button is pressed, the temporary auxiliary graphic help information ofa l l elements is made permanent.



T I P :

In models with a big number of geometrical error elements many additional graphic elements will be created.

Attention: This will require a long computing time. Due to these additional auxiliary elements the model can become too difficult to grasp and to complex to manage it.

Suggestion: Consider if it was not more appropriate to generate only i nd i v idua l auxiliary elements for so me selected error elements.

o

Delete Auxil iary Graphic Help Information button

If this button is clicked, the permanent auxiliary graphic help information of a l l elements is deleted.

Alternative:

To give the user the possibility to delete the permanent auxiliary graphic help information of all elements also from CATIA without starting Q-CHECKER, there is a alternative delete facility provided in the menu „TransCAT Software“ > item „Erase Marking Elements“ (see the second menu item in the screenshot „Start Q-CHECKER from CATIA menu“ on page 21).

a

Mark Violated Entit ies Button

If this button is clicked, the Mark Violated Entit ies window is opened. This window offers three options:

• You can specify layers, where incorrect elements can be transferred to.

• incorrect elements can be color marked.

• Incorrect elements can be transferred into the SHOW area to make them visible.



1/=!

1/=@ 1/=#

1/=$

1/=% 1/=^

ATTENTION:

Before changing the layer attribution or before setting the SHOW attribute of an entity, consider i f this is admi t t ed by the firm’s design regulations.

1/=! Selection l ist box

You can select if the changes to be specified by the options�1/=@, 1/=#, and 1/=$ should be applied for • the current element or criterion or

• all violated entities.

1/=@ Change Layer option

When the Change Layer option is activated, you can specify with the spinner a number of a layer, where the violated entitie(s) should be transferred to.



1/=# Change Color option

If this option is activated, the violated entitie(s) can be provided with a color mark. To do so, click on a color box or enter a number in the text box. You can also use the spinner.

The colors 1 (white), 2 (red), 3 (green), 4 (blue), 5 (yellow), which are in the big color boxes, are fixed colors. The colors in the little color boxes are administrator defined.

With the button “None” the color assignation is erased.

1/=$ Set SHOW Attribute option

When this option is activated, to the violated entitie(s) will be transferred in the SHOW area.

1/=% Close button

When this button is clicked, the dialog is closed with applying the settings.

1/=^ Cancel button

When this button is clicked, the dialog is aborted, the settings are discarded.

s

Element Info toggle switch

When this toggle switch is pressed, in the Analysis window under the Messages for the user box 2#, the Element info box 2% is opened.

d

Activate CATIA button

If this button is clicked, the screen display will be switched to the CATIA-application mode. There you can use the following permanent functions: BR, SV, ZM, WI, NP, NS, ST, DISPLAY MODE, L= and KEYBOARD.

Exit this application with YES: BACK. As this is an IUA-Macro, the selection of other functions leads to an abortion of the Q-CHECKER.

f

Buffer Refresh button

If this button is clicked, the screen display is refreshed.

g

Healing button

If this button is clicked, the general healing for all elements is started according to the settings in the current check profile (if there healing options are activated).



ATTENTION:

In the most of cases, the system administrators will not allow healing operations. This will prevent errors which could result from uncontrolled automatic healing (us certain errors must be corrected in different ways according to the circumstances). Another motivation is to let the designer appreciate the errors himself and to give him the control of the error correcting.

N O T E :

When the general healing with the healing button is not admitted in the check profile: Select a criterion or an element and look on the healing possibilities panel 2@. Here an ind i v idua l hea l ing may be offered to the user.

h

Display check profi le button

When this button is clicked, the current check profile is displayed com-pletely (but can not be changed, although seemingly settings can be made).

1^ .

Display Current Criterion button

When this button is clicked, the check profile for the selected criterion will be displayed (but can not be changed, although seemingly settings can be made).

1&

Criterion Help button

After clicking on this button, for the selected criterion or element a browser with criteria-specific help is opened. This help includes normally illustra-tions, the problem description, a suggested solution, and an application tip.

The browser used can be specified in the QCHECKER.par file.

1*

Edit Q-Checker options

For detailed information see description on page 24.

1(

Create XML report button

For detailed information see chapter 2.1.4 External Analysis Window on page 38.



NOTE:

If in the Confirm window there was activated the Create only report option and, additionally, the Do not show this message again check box was activated, the external analysis window can not opened more from the Q-CHECKER analysis window with the Create XML report button.

In these case, the external analysis window is to be started at the prompt or in Q-CHECKER the Confirm window must be activated (see Edit Q-CHECKER Options—Others tab card on page 25).

2) Detailed check results box

The box offers the following facilities:

• The colored symbol before the criterion/element name gives an easy recognition of the error category. Note: The error category of a criterion and its color symbol depend on the administrator’s firm-specific definition.

• The results can be sorted by their priority, weight, the number of faulty elements per criterion, or the alphabetic order of the criterion name.

• Clicking on the symbols before the criterion names in the listing makes visible the elements that do not fulfil the respective criterion (when the listing is sorted by elements, the respective criterion will be made visible). The elements (or criterions) are hidden again by clicking on the symbol.



2!

Open all entries button

If this button is pressed, in the elements/criteria tree a l l subordinate element/criteria names will be shown (the tree will be completely expanded).

Close al l entries button

If this button is pressed, a l l subordinate element/criteria names will be h idden , so that only the superordinate element/criteria names remain displayed (the tree will be completely “collapsed”).

2@

Previous/Next Entry Buttons

With this buttons, the cursor is moved up/down from criterion to criterion or from element to element.

2# Healing Possibil it ies box

In this box for the highlighted element, information on the healing possibility is displayed.

2$ Info box

In this box, information on criteria and elements as well as error messages is displayed.

2% Element info box

This box is visible when the Element Info toggle switch is pressed. In this box general information on the element selected is displayed (element type, occupied workspace, layer, set and show state).

2^

Close Analysis Window Button

When this button is clicked, the window will be closed. The original model visualization (zoom, position) will be restored.

2&

Close Analysis Window Button

When this button is clicked, the window will be closed. The current model visualization will be maintained.



2.1.4 External Analysis Window

The external analysis window is an add-on program working Q-CHECKER ind e p e nd e n t l y . It allows displaying the detailed check results 0utside and independently of Q-CHECKER. The external access to this information by the means of an independent viewer gives the advantage that Q-CHECKER can be shut down, the Q-CHECKER license being released; furthermore the check results can be looked up when working on the model in CATIA.

The external analysis window can be regarded as a sort of reference and note sheet. In addition to the visualization of the detail information on the state of the model, the user will be enabled to mark the different error categories and elements with check marks and to record comments on the error categories and elements.

The aspect of the external analysis windows’ graphical user interface is analogous to the aspect of the Q-CHECKER internal analysis window. However the CATIA model can n o t be edited, the buttons in the external analyse window allowing only to modify the form of r ep resen ta t ion of the information.

The external analysis window can be accessed in two ways:

(1) Start from the Q-Checker by button click (see chapter 2.1.4.1 on page 38);

(2) start by command in (see chapter 2.1.4.2 on page 40).

2.1.4.1 Starting the External Analysis Window

From Within Q-CHECKER

When pressing in the Q-CHECKER analysis window the Create XML report button (see page 35, the analysis window content will be exported in an XML file.

When this button has been pressed, at first the Confirm window will be opened offering several options. On of these options is to be selected. Depending on the option selected, only XML export will be executed or the external analysis window will be opened too.



q w e

r

t y q Create only report option

Wird diese Option gewählt, wirddie XML-Datei mit den Prüfergebnissen erzeugt.If this option is selected, only the export of the XML check report file will be executed. The external analysis window n o t will be opened, Q-CHECKER remains active. The created XML file afterwards can be opened in the external analysis window with the Open button (see page 42 )

w Create report and open viewer option

If this option is selected, the export of the XML check report file will be executed and the external analysis window will be opened. In this window the check results will be visualized. The Q-CHECKER window no t remains in the fo re g ro und with its fu l l f unc t iona l i t y .

e Create report, open viewer and close Q-Checker option

As described under w, Q-CHECKER will be terminated.

r Do not show this message again check box

If this check box is activated, afterwards, when pressing the button Create XML report, the Confirm window will not be opened more; the option activated last in this window will be executed immediately. If e. g. the Create only report option has been activated, after clicking the Create XML report button every time only the XML check report file will be generated.

To be able to change this fixed selection, the Confirm window must be activated again. To do so, in the Edit Q-CHECKER Options window on the Others tab card (see page 25) the check box „Confirm ‚Create XML Report of the analysis window’ in analysis window“ is to be activated.



t Execute button

When this button is clicked, the selected option q, w or e will be executed. The selection made also will be saved, and will be preselected when pressing again the Create XML report button.

y Cancel Button

When this button is pressed, the operation will be aborted.

If one of the options w or e is selected, the external analysis window will be opened.

2.1.4.2 Starting the External Analysis Window at the Prompt

OS Command V4 UNIX

.../qcheckerV4_1.8.1/load/<Plattform>/ TCAQcheckerAnalysisViewer

When the command is been submitted, the external analysis window will be opened with no file opened. Use the Open button to open an XML check report file.



2.1.4.3 Layout of the External Analysis Window

q

w to s

d

f

g

h

In the external analysis window the check results are represented in the same complete extend and with the same representation facilities as in the Q-CHECKER internal analysis window. But in contrast to the internal analysis window, the external analysis window does n o t provide any tools that would allow the user making modifications on the checked the model. The external analysis window can be regarded both as a sort of reference and note sheet: It gives the user the detailed information about the state of the model, even when Q-CHECKER itself is closed. And furthermore it enables the user to put flags marking the state of the work on the elements and to record comments on the elements. The tools of the external analysis window allow adapting the representation of the information.



q Window headline

Contains the window name and the name of the displayed XML check report file.

w

Open button

With this button an XML check report file can be opened.

e

Save button

With this button the working state flags and user remarks can be saved in the XML check report file.

r

Exit Button

When this button is pressed, the external analysis window will be closed.

t

Expand tree button

If this button is pressed, for a l l criteria the elements will be shown.

y

Collapse tree button

If this button is pressed, the elements of a l l criteria will be hidden, only the criteria names remaining displayed.

u

Previous/Next Entry buttons

With this buttons, the cursor is moved up/down from criterion to criterion or from element to element.

i

Element Info toggle switch

If this toggle switch is pressed, in the Analysis window under the Messages for the user box d, the info box f is opened.

o

Report Info button

When this button is pressed, a window will be opened containing the basic information on the check report.



a

Options button

When this button is pressed, the Options window will be opened. In this window, it is possible to select the font to display the external analysis window and the font attributes (incl. code page).

s




d Detailed check results box

The contents of this box and the functionality of the elements in it largely are identical to those of the Q-CHECKER internal analysis window (cf. page 36). The external analysis window however provides an additional function:

To the left of every error name and element name there is a c heck box , where by clicking a check mark can be put in. This facility can be used to mark the state of work on the elements.

f Info box

In this box, information on criteria and elements as well as error messages is displayed.

g Element info box

This box is visible when the Element Info toggle switch is pressed. In this box general information on the element selected is displayed (element type, occupied workspace, layer, set and show state).

h User remarks box

In this box, the user can enter remarks 0n every criterion and on every element. These remarks will be saved in the XML check report file so that they can be read afterwards too.

2.2 Batch Operation

The batch mode allows multiple models selection in order to check them automatically one after the other.

The Q-CHECKER batch-mode can be configured and started in two different ways:



• interactively from within Q-CHECKER

• by UNIX commands.

2.2.1 Starting Batch Operation From Within

Q-Checker

When this button on Q-CHECKER main window has been pressed, the Batch Settings window is opened, where the settings for batch run can be made and from where batch operation can be started.

The window consists of two tab cards, which will be described in the following ( 7Settings tab card on page 47).



Selection Tab Card On the Selection tab card the model files can be chosen, which are to be checked in the batch operation.

q w

e

rt

y u i Description:

q Select the filter mode.

• If the option „Wildcard“ is chosen, the character * in the input field „Filter“ e is used as wildcard.

• If the option „Regular Expression“ is chosen, the syntax of regular expressions is valid in the input field „Filter“ e.

• If the option „Case Sensitive“ is activated, in the input field „Filter“ e upper and lower case will be considered. Otherwise all letters will be used as capital letters.

w Select the access mode for the CATIA model files. Four access modes are available:

• CATIA Declaration Files The CATIA model files are shown.

• UNIX File Tree The UNIX file tree is shown.

r t

q



• Current Session The list of the models is shown, which are used in the current session.

• Current Selection The current selection of models is shown. This list contains all models already selected, which will be checked in the batch-run.

T I P :

To make the selection of subdirectories and branches of model trees easier, the c o n t e x t - se ns i t i ve me nu can be used, providing the Check the items recursively and Uncheck the items recursively options (Select/ unselect all items from here). This allows to select/unselect several subdirectories/features at once.

e Define a filter for the model selection in window t.

r The CATIA model directories are displayed.

• If the check box on the left side of the model directory is activated, a l l model-files in this model directory will be selected for the batch-run.

• If the name of the Model directory is selected, a list with all model files therein is displayed in the window t.

t Select here the models to be checked in batch operation.

y Start Batch job button

When this button is pressed, the Batch Job Panel is opened (see below on page 50)

u Reset batch definition button

Annul previously made selection.

i Cancel button

Cancel the batch run definition and close the Batch Settings window. N o batch run will be executed.



Settings tab card On the Settings tab card you can make all the other settings necessary for the Q-CHECKER

batch job.

q w

e r

t y u

i

o a s

d

f

g

Description:

q Specify the Control file (Input file) of the Batch-run. Additionally to the name of the input file it is possible to specify the path where the file is stored.

If no entry is made, the file QCHECKER.in will be searched in the current directory (from where CATIA was started).

w Specify the Output-file. Additionally to the name of the output file it is possible to specify the path where the file should be stored.

If no entry is made, the file QCHECKER.out will be stored in the current directory (from where CATIA was started).



e Environment l ist box

Select the environment (keyword: *ENVIRONMENT). Depending on the environ-ment selected, the check profiles available in the Profi le list box do va r y (cf. description for ).

r Profi le l ist box

Select the check profile (keyword: *PROFILE). For explication see chapter 2.1.1 / Profi le l ist box list box on page 27.

t Report Combo box

Specify or select the name of the check report file (Keyword: *REPORT).

y Use Model Name as Report Name check box

If this check box is activated, the model name is used for the report name. (Keyword: *REPORT_AS_MODEL)

For detailed description of and see Report combo box/ Use Model Name as Report Name check box on page 28

u Perform Healing Check Box

If this check box is activated, healing will be performed.-This option takes effect only if, in the profile, healing is allowed for the criterion. (Keyword: *HEAL).

i Save checked model Check Box

If this check box is activated, the model will be saved. (Keyword: *SAVE).

o Create Identif iers for Violated Entit ies Check Box

If this check box is activated, for violated entities identifiers are created. (In some cases, this may last several hours). (Keyword: *CREATE_IDENTIFIER)

a Save to different model f i le/directory check box

If this check box is no t activated, the checked model will be saved in the d i r e c -t o r y indicated in the text box on the r i gh t .

If this check box is ac t i va t e d , the checked model can be saved in an o t he r d i r ec to r y . To do so, specify the directory.

(Keyword: *WRITE).

When this button is clicked, a window will be opened where the CATIA

model files are displayed.

When this button is clicked, the directories window will be opened.

s Rename model check box

If this check box is activated, the model will be renamed. (Keyword: *RENAME)



Select the renaming mode :

• I n se r t : The specified Name will be inse r t ed in the model name starting on the Index position.

• O ve rw r i t e : The specified Name will o ve rw r i t e the model name starting on the Index position.

• N e w N ame : The model will be saved under the new Name. (Keyword: *RENAME_MODE)

ATTENTION:

Use the New Name option only if in the check run o n e o n l y model is to be checked.

If the batch run is executed with this option for se ve ra l models, a l l models will be saved under o ne and t he same name specified here. If these models are saved all in the same d i r ec to r y , the respective current model will o ve rw r i t e the model saved before.

d Replace model check box

If this check box is activated, existing models will be overwritten by the checked (and, possibly, corrected) models. Keyword: *REPLACE

f Database options

This function is available only if Q-CHECKER l i c ense fo r da tabase connec t ion has been purchased. The screenshot above shows the disabled state.

(For the enabled state see below g, h, j).

ATTENTION:

The database options are enabled only, when the following settings have been made: • In the environment file, the variable QCLICDB must be set on

YES (to make available the license). • In the QCHECKER.par file (in the admin directory), after the

entry qchecker.DB_CONNECT_INTERACTIVE, the para-meter must be YES (to allow the user the database access).

To make these settings operative, restart Q-CHECKER.

g For the description of these buttons Selection Tab Card on page 45.



h

j

k

h When the database connection option is available, and the check box is activated,

than text boxes will be available, which offer the possibility to write additional customer report information in the database.

The Checking Mode and Customer Number text boxes, you can see above on the screenshot, are predefined in Q-CHECKER’s delivery condition. The administrator can define other text boxes for customer specific report information (both the variable name and the related values can be defined according to the user’s needs).

j k

If the check box is activated, the text filled in the text box will be written in the database.

In the t e x t bo xe s yo u can enter a text (letters or figures depending on the adminis-trator settings). When the Default button is pressed, the text in the text box will be replaced by default text.

Batch Job Panel

q

w e

q Create only input f i le button

If this button is activated, in the current directory only the Input file is created.



ATTENTION:

If this button is activated, no batch job is started. The input file QCHECKER.in can be used for starting the batch job by UNIX command (see chapter 2.2.2 Starting Batch on page 51).

w Start batch run button

When this button is pressed, the batch run is started.

e Abort button

When this button is pressed, the batch definition is discarded; no batch run is started.

2.2.2 Starting Batch Check Operation

by Command Input

Under UNIX the start command is entered in a UNIX shell.

The command must be entered in the path where the Q-CHECKER script (qcheckerV4) is situated (by default in the Q-CHECKER install path). Alternatively the command may be entered also from within an other path, but in this case whole the path must be specified.

OS Command

UNIX qcheckerV4 –b –i path/file.in –o path/file.out

• Exp lana t ion o f the pa ramete rs :

Keyword Description

–b Starts the batch run

–i path/file.in Specification of the path and name of the control file (input file) for the batch run. If no specification is made, the QCHECKER.in file is searched in the directory, where the command is entered.

–o path/file.out Specification of the path and name of the output file for the batch run. If no specification is made, the QCHECKER.out file is created in the directory, where the command is entered.



Prerequisites for the batch run:

• The respective CATIA environment must be set.

• The input file *.in (default name: QCHECKER.in) must be available, and in this file all the settings must have been made.

Example fi le: QCHECKER.in

*READ CHECKER #*MODEL VDACS *STRING VDACS #*ALL YES *ENVIRONMENT DEFAULT *DEFAULT_PROFILE_PATH USR *PROFILE STRUCTURE *REPORT CHECK-REPORT *HEAL NO *SAVE NO *CREATE_IDENTIFIER NO *WRITE CHECKER *RENAME_MODE OVERWRITE *RENAME 50 CHECKED *REPLACE NO *DB_CONNECT BATCH YES *DB_CUSTOMER_INFO CHECKING_MODE BATCH *RUN YES

In the input file, first of all, there must be defined the names of the directories or the UNIX

paths, where the models are situated (keyword *READ).

It is possible to select the models by the model name (keyword *MODEL), by a character string (keyword *STRING), or to select all model names (keyword *ALL YES/NO).

Ranking order of the keywords: *MODEL > *STRING > *ALL

In this order, the program searches for the first relevant entry in the *.in file. If, for example, the option *STRING is to be used, the *MODEL keyword must have no parameter or must be commented out by the # sign. If, for example, the option *ALL (YES) is to be used, the *MODEL and *STRING keywords must have no parameter or must be commented out.

When entering the model name, pay attention for exact writing:



• Maintain the number of blanks.

• Take account of leading spaces.

(Blanks in the example are represented by underlines.)

Example:

The model to check has the name: _VDACS_ _DEMO_1

The model name must be specified as follows: *MODEL_ _VDACS_ _DEMO_1

The selection of the check profile is determined by 3 keywords:

• *ENVIRONMENT—catalog name of the environment to be selected

• *DEFAULT_PROFILE_PATH—state of the check profile (administrator or user check profile)

• *PROFILE—check profile to be used for the check. It is possible to use standard check profiles as well as user check profiles (keyword: *DEFAULT_PROFILE USR/ADMIN).

The keyword *HEAL determines whether, after checking, the healing is to be performed. The keyword *SAVE YES/NO controls whether the model is to be saved after checking, and if so—in which model file (keyword *WRITE).

In addition, it can be specified whether the model is to be renamed. In the case of renaming, in the model name, starting from a certain position, a character string can be inserted, or the model name can be overwritten, starting from this position (keyword *RENAME COLUMN + NAME; e. g. *RENAME 50 CHECKED – starting from position 50 CHECKED will be written). For position a number between 0 and 80 is allowed. If for position 0 is specified, the model will be saved under the specified new name. In the case that the model is to be saved in the same model directory, with the keyword *REPLACE YES/NO it can be determined if it is allowed or not to overwrite an existing model.

With the keyword *REPORT, a collective name for the *.txt, *htm, *.qcreport and *.xml check reports can be predefined, to which the program adds a sequential number. In case the name of the check report and the model name should be identical, the keyword *REPORT_AS_MODEL is to be used.



The actual batch operation is launched with the RUN YES keyword.

If in the *.in input file will be inserted additional keyword blocks, it will be possible to define and launch with this file several batch operations. The blocks do not must contain all keywords. Obligatory keywords are, however, *READ, one of the keywords *MODEL / *STRING / *ALL as well as *PROFILE and *RUN YES. For the missing keywords the default settings will be used. The order, in which the keywords are written, is not important; only the *RUN keyword must be at the end of the block. If a block should be deactivated, the easiest way to do this is to set the *RUN NO option.

2.2.2.1 *.out and *.out.html Output Files—Batch-Run Survey

As a result of the batch run—additionally to the report files of the individual checked models—output files with a batch survey are compiled: either a text file or an HTML file. The default names are QCHECKER.out and QCHECKER.out.html, the user can specify an other name.

Which of these two files will be opened after the batch run depends on the settings in the QCHECKER.par file. If the parameter CALL_BROWSER_FOR_BATCH_OUTPUT is set on YES, the HTML file will be opened; if on NO—the text file.

Both files—*.out and *.out.html—have in essence have the same content (below you can find the example for the text output file). The HTML output file, however, gives the advantage that the sequential number and the file names of the checked models are linked. By clicking on the sequential number, the survey of the check settings for the respective model is fetched; clicking on the file name will open the check report of the model.

The *.out file contains:

• the check status (in Return column): 0 – check OK; 4 – general error occurred (normally); 8 – critical error occurred(e. g. missing Q-CHECKER or CATIA license, missing environment file, missing check profile file, report could not be generated due to lacking disk space or missing write permission etc.).

• a listing of the error categories and their respective error weight,

• a table with the names of the checked models with a general information on the check results (among other things, the number of the detected errors)

• a listing of the executed check runs and the checked models For every check run, a recapitulation of the keyword settings from the QCHECKER.in



file is given. For every checked model the name of the related check report is given.

NOTE:

For the encoding of the HTML files generated by Q-CHECKER V4 since version V 1.10 it can be selected between Latin-1. and Unicode UTF-8 (for previous versions only Latin-1 is possible).

Output Text File–Example

Q-CHECKER Version: 1.9.1 (C) 2000 TransCAT GmbH Karlsruhe Germany Q-CHECKER started in batch mode. TransCAT licenses will be checked! CATIA will be initialized! Check result ============== Prio 0 : Interrupt condition Prio 1 : KO Criterion (81) Prio 2 : Major Error (27) Prio 3 : Error (9) Prio 4 : Major Defect (3) Prio 5 : Defect (1) Prio 6 : Warning (0)



====================================================================================================== |No|Modelname |Return|Seal |Seal |Assess- |Prio0|Prio1|Prio2|Prio3|Prio4|Prio5|Prio6|Healing| | | | |tested|result|ment | | | | | | | | | +--+-----------------+------+------+------+--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-------+ |1 |Handle.CATPart | 0 | No | - | KO | - | 2 | - | 5 | - | - | - | No | +--+-----------------+------+------+------+--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-------+ |2 |wheel_rim.CATPart| 0 | No | - | KO | - | 1 | - | - | - | 3 | - | No | +--+-----------------+------+------+------+--------+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-----+-------+ Run: 1 ====== *READ D:\Programme\TransCAT *MODEL TC Handgriff.CATPart *STRING *ALL NO *HEAL NO *RENAME_MODE OVERWRITE *SAVE NO *WRITE D:\Programme\TransCAT *RENAME *REPLACE NO *ENVIRONMENT DEFAULT *DEFAULT_PROFILE_PATH ADMIN *PROFILE NOTHING *REPORT_AS_MODEL NO *REPORT Test_Series_1 *DB_CONNECT_BATCH NO *RUN YES No. 1 ----- Model to be loaded: Handle.CATPart Record filename: Handle.CATPart Run: 2 ====== *READ D:\Programme\TransCAT *MODEL wheel_rim.CATPart *STRING *ALL NO *HEAL NO *RENAME_MODE OVERWRITE *SAVE NO *WRITE D:\Programme\TransCAT *RENAME *REPLACE NO *ENVIRONMENT DEFAULT *DEFAULT_PROFILE_PATH ADMIN *PROFILE NOTHING *REPORT_AS_MODEL NO *REPORT Test_Series_2 *DB_CONNECT_BATCH NO *RUN YES No. 2 ----- Model to be loaded: wheel_rim.CATPart Record filename: wheel_rim.CATPart Summary number of runs: 2



T I P :

To get a correct representation of the check result table in the QCHECKER.out file, select a monospace font (e. g. Courier, CourierNew).

Overview of the Keywords Keyword Parameter Description

*READ ALIAS / PFAD • Alias or path, where the models are that are to be loaded

*MODEL ( 1 ) MODEL NAME • Model name (without suffix .model) *STRING ( 2 ) SUBSTRING • All model names, containing SUBSTRING *ALL ( 3 ) • All models in the path *ENVIRONMENT NAME OF THE

ENVIRONMENT • Name of the environment

*DEFAULT_PROFILE_ PATH

ADMIN/USR • State of the check profile: administrator or user check profile (is controlled by the path, default: ADMIN)

*PROFILE NAME • Name of the Profile (without suffix .qcprofile)

*REPORT_AS_MODEL YES / NO • Name of the report file identical / not identical with the model name.

*REPORT NAME • Name of the report file *HEAL YES / NO • Execute healing or not *CREATE_IDENTIFIER YES / NO • Write identifiers of drawing elements in the report

or not (in some cases, this may take several hours.)

*SAVE YES / NO • Save the modified model or not *WRITE ALIAS / PATH • Alias name or path, where modified models are to

be stored. • The use of the keyword *WRITE makes sense

only if the keyword *SAVE is used with the parameter YES.

*RENAME_MODE INSERT/ OVERWRITE

• Controls whether the NAME that is entered with the keyword *RENAME is to be inserted (INSERT) or overwritten (OVERWRITE) at the Position COLUMN (default: OVERWRITE).

*RENAME COLUMN + NAME • COLUMN: Input of a numerical value for the character position in the model name, starting with which the name is to be changed. If this value is set to 0, the model will be saved with the NAME here entered.

• NAME: Input of the string which is used for renaming.

• The use of the keyword *RENAME makes sense only if the keyword *SAVE is used with the parameter YES.



Keyword Parameter Description

*REPLACE YES / NO • Overwrite a model with a model with the same name or not

• The use of the keyword *REPLACE makes sense only if the keyword *SAVE is used with the parameter YES.

*DB_CONNECT_BATCH YES / NO • Write the reports in the database or not *DB_CUSTOMER_INFO see QCHECKER.db

file • This keyword allows to store additional custo-

mized information about the check in the database.

• For detailed information see QCHECKER.db file.

YES • End of the batch definition, start of the batch operation *RUN

NO • End of the batch definition, n o start of the batch operation

3 . V A L I D A T I O N O F E X T E R N A L C H E C K S E A L S


3. Validation of External Check Seals

For information about validation of in t e rna l check seals see chapter 4.3.6 Check Seal Validation on page 78.

The external check seal is a text file that is ind e p e nd e nt from the model (naming convention: <Reportname>.qcseal). It is generated by Q-CHECKER if in the QCHECKER.par file the generation of such a check seal has been activated (keyword qchecker.CHECK_SEAL_EXTERNAL). Alternatively, the activation of the generation of this check seal can be made also in the check profile (for detailed information see chapters 4.3.7 Check Seal Creation on page 81 and 6.3 QCHECKER.par—General Q-Checker Settings on page 363).

To validate an external check seal there is executed a comparison of check sums for the model, the check profile as well as for the check seal itself, that are stored in the check seal, with the present state of the model, the check profile and the check seal. If there modifications have taken place, the validation program edits an error code.

The check is performed with the validation program qc_seal_val.exe, supplied with Q-CHECKER, WHICH can be started exclusively at the prompt.

Program start

qc_seal_val <CheckSealFile> [-h] [-c|-d <Docfile>|-p <Profile>]

Parameter Explication Error code

-h • Print help text for this command - -c • Validate check seal file 1 -d <Docfile> • Validate model 2 -p <Profile> • Validate profile 4

Notes:

• A t l e a s t o n e of the options -h, -c or -p must be used.

• To get output the error code, the following commands must be entered. UNIX: $? WINDOWS: %ERRORLEVEL%

• For a model with a va l id check seal (when the model, the check profile and the check seal itself are OK) the output is 0.

• If more than one check sum is invalid, the error codes are added up.

• The error code output in case of a general error is 128.

3 . V A L I D A T I O N O F E X T E R N A L C H E C K S E A L S


Examples:

qc_seal_val ExternalCheckSeal.qcseal -c

The validation is executed for the check sum of the external check seal file ExternalCheckSeal.qcseal.

The following error codes may be output:

• 0 check sum is OK

• 1 check sum of the external check seal is not OK

qc_seal_val “ExternalCheckSeal.qcseal” -c -d /tmp/MyPart.CATPart

The validation is executed for the check sums of the external check seal file ExternalCheckSeal.qcseal and for the CATIA model MyPart.CATPart in the /tmp.directory. The following error codes may be output:

• 0 check sum is OK

• 1 check sum of the external check seal is not OK

• 2 check sum of the CATIA model is not OK

• 3 check sum of the external check seal and of the CATIA model is not OK (Error codes 1 and 2 added up to 3).

4 . C R I T E R I A


4. Criteria

In this chapter, the criteria will be explained with their screenshot. As Q-CHECKER is in permanent development, some criteria screenshots may not show all standard elements the criterion has in the current program version. The complete description of the standard elements you can find in chapter 4.2 Standard Parameters and Elements on page 66.

4.1 Check-Profile Editor

With the check-profile editor new Q-CHECKER check profiles can be created and existing check profiles can be modified. The criteria are grouped according to their function, the groups being placed on the different tab cards of the profile editor window.

q

w

er

t y u i o

e r

4 . C R I T E R I A


q Tab cards for criteria folder selection

w Check criteria box

In the check criteria box the different criteria can be activated or deactivated; for most of the criteria settings can me made. For the settings in the criteria there are stan-dard elements used in all or many of the criteria as well as elements for specific functions.

For the most of criteria the user can specify parameters (numerical values, texts, options). These settings are decisive for the check result—whether models or their elements will be considered to be defective or not.

Standard elements will be described in chapter 4.2 Standard Parameters and Elements starting from page 66.

The detailed description of the function and the parameter settings you will find thereafter in the following subchapters of this chapter. The chapter structure for the criteria description is identical to the folder attribution of the criteria in the profile editor.

e

Apply values to al l other model types button

If this button is pressed, the standard settings will be applied to a l l o t he r defined model types.

This button is activated only:

• if the Model Type Dependent Check Profi le check b0x of the Profi le Settings criterion is activated

• an d if in the Model Types list box the standard settings are selected.

Function of the button:

When clicked, the standard settings of a l l criteria (the criteria of all tab cards visible or not visible) will be transferred to all other defined model types.

N o t e : The action of the analog Apply Values to All Other Model Types button in many of the criteria boxes (small button) is unlike the action of the present button—this latter transfers the settings only for the r e sp e c t i v e ( o n e ) criterion to all other model types.

For detailed explanation how to use model type dependent check profiles see chapter 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles on page 379.

r Model Type l ist box

If the respective check profile is model type-dependent and hence contains model types, so in this list box, one of the predefined model types can be selected.

4 . C R I T E R I A


N o t e : The action of the analog Apply Values to All Other Model Types button in many of the criteria boxes (small button) is unlike the action of the present button—this latter transfers the settings only for the r e sp e c t i v e ( o n e ) criterion to all other model types.

For the use of model types see chapter 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles on page 379.

t

Save temporari ly button

Save the settings in a user profile with the file name USR.qcprofile. Each time the button is pressed again, this file is overwritten.

y

Cancel button

When this button is pressed, the setting modifications made in the current session will be aborted.

u

Save button

Save the settings for further use in a n e w o r e x i s t ing check p ro f i l e , having a use r d e f ine d name . The check profile name can be entered or (if an existing check profile is to be changed) selected in the check profile list box. After saving, the new check profile is available in the Check Profi les combo box (see below).

When this button is pressed, the settings will be saved in an existing or a new check profile for further use.

i Check Profi les combo box

For detailed description see chapters: 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles on page 379; 6.11 <FILTERLIST>.fi lter—Filter List on page 390; Profi le list box on page 27.

4 . C R I T E R I A


o

Export Profi le Survey button

When this button is pressed, the generation of a general survey of the check profile in XML or HTML format is started.

The XML profile survey contains a l l information of the check profile; for the export of the HTML profile survey there is given the possibility to select the columns to be included. The HTML profile survey can be used for instance to be imported in MICROSOFT EXCEL.

The XML or HTML profile survey is named with the name of the check profile (e. g.: with the check profile name USR, the survey will be named USR.xml or USR.html).

The survey file will be stored in the same catalog as the Q-CHECKER user check profiles (cf. chapter 6.11 <FILTERLIST>.fi lter—Filter List on page 390).

The default catalog is the User Home catalog:

alias QCUSER = catia.QCHECKER_USER='$HOME';

After pressing the button, a dialog box is opened, where the survey’s format and content are to be defined, whereupon the export can be started.

9=! 9=% 9=^ 9=@

9=#

9=$

9=& 9=* 9=! Export Format radio button

Select here whether the profile survey is to be exported in XML or in HTML format. When the HT M L option is selected, on the right site of the dialog box a selection list is opened, where with the check boxes it can be selected which columns have to be in the HTML table.—For XML export no column selection is available, it will be exported the complete check profile with all columns.

9=%

4 . C R I T E R I A


9=@ Encoding l ist box

Select here the code table for the export—available only if HTML export format is selected.

9=# Only currently chosen model type radio button

Select here whether the profile survey has to contain only the selected model type (Yes option) or all model types (No option).

A selection is here possible only if in the Options folder for the Profi le Settings option the Model type dependent profi le is activated.

9=$ Only criteria selected for check radio button

Select here whether the profile survey has to contain only the check criteria, activated in the current check profile (Yes option), or all check criteria (No option).

9=% Choose columns to be created l ist box

(This list box is displayed only if an HTML profile survey is to be created.)

Select in the list box with the check boxes which columns are to be created.

The Criterion Name column is created in each case irrespective of being selected or not.

The columns marked with * are created only once irrespective of including one or several model types in the table (and not before the columns of every model type).

9=^ Move down / Move up buttons

With these buttons, a selected column identifier can be moved up or down, thus changing the column position in the table.

9=& Export with current settings button

When this button is clicked, the export is initiated; an XML or an HTML profile survey will be generated.

9=* Cancel Button

When this button is clicked, the check profile definition is aborted; a profile survey will be not generated.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.2 Standard Parameters and Elements

Along with the elements, allowing to make the criteria specific settings, the criteria boxes contain a number of elements and functions, that appear in all or many of the criteria boxes. In the demonstration screenshot below these standard elements will be introduced.

q

w

io

e r t y 6=!

u

q Check check box

With this check box, it can be controlled if the criterion is to be included in the current check profi le or not. To include a criterion in a check profile, the Check check box is to be activated.

w

Open fi le button

When this button is pressed, an editor with a text file will be opened. This file contains settings for the respective check (depending on check criterion this can be e. g. settings for name check, color value check, layer number check, filter name check or other). TransCAT delivers with Q-CHECKER files named SAMPLE.*, containing examples and explanations. These files must be adapted by the user for his specific check aims.

NOTE When saving this file, the name e x t e n s io n must be maintained (e. g. *.elementname), because otherwise Q-CHECKER can not identify this file.

The filename itself can be specified by the user according to his demands. This name will be indicated in the text box on the right of the Open fi le button.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e Element selection set to be used l ist box

The default value for the element selection is “Use standard element selection”. When this value is used, the normal case of the element selection takes place: The criteria use the default element selection set, that is assigned to the model type (selected with the Model Type Default Element Selection option—see chapter 4.3.5 on page 77).

If to a criterion an o t he r than the default element selection is to be applied, the element selection set must be selected with this list box.

r Processing Groups l ist box

For the execution of checks q as well as for the healing operations r, �the criteria can be assigned to processing groups. To which of the processing groups 1, 2 … n a criterion is assigned, is to be determined according to the significance of the respective criterion. The importance of the processing groups is that criteria of a high-ranking group are check and (if healing is activated) then healed before criteria of a low-ranking group are checked and healed.

Rank order of the processing groups: 1 > 2 > … > n.

The quantity of available processing groups depends on the administrators definitions in the PROFILE.par file (see chapter 6.4 CRITERIA.par and TCACriterionTable.exe—Criteria Management on page 368).

Benefit of processing in groups: The check operation can be stopped in case a high-ranked criterion (especially a cri-terion having an interrupt condition) is found, that has a fault. In this case, there is no need to find out faulty elements of low-ranked criteria, computing capacity can be released for other processes.

t Weight

With the Weight list box the user can assign an individual weight to the respective criterion. The error weight is used to qualify the importance of the criterion’s viola-tion, it makes easier to interpret the check result.

The user can choose between different predefined assessment names with associ-ated color sign (circle, star, triangle etc. with a predefined color) and numerical value („grade“).

The Q-CHECKER IS delivered with predefined weights in the rank order Warning > Defect > Major Defect > Error > Major Error > KO criterion > Interruption condition.

The system administrator can in the PROFILE.par file define additional or less error categories with other names, other numeric weight (“mark”), and other color signs. (See chapter 6.5 PROFILE.par—Model Assessment on page 377).

4 . C R I T E R I A


y Add Up Weights check box

If this option is activated, all detected errors violating the respective criterion will be a d d e d u p .

If this box is n o t activated, all errors violating a criterion will be taken into account only o n c e .

6=! Add up weights l ist box

This list box is available for all geometry criteria which check elements that can have several subelements (e. g. when checking a solid on mini-elements, it is possible that se ve ra l undersized faces will be found).

In the list box, there is the choice between two alternatives:

• Sum up we igh t o f en t i t i e s : Sum-up is executed for element error weights only (for every error element only o ne error is taken in account, irrespective of how many error subelements it comprises).

• Sum up we igh t o f sub i t ems : The error weight of a l l subelements is summed up.

Summing up the error weights of the subelements can in many cases allow a more realistic assessment of the model state.

u Heal check box

For many criteria, a healing option is available. If the Heal check box is activated, detected errors will be corrected au t o mat i c a l l y . In the line under the checkbox, information is given what correction will be executed. For some criteria, the user can choose between different healing alternatives.

i

Apply values to al l other model types button

The Apply Values to All Other Model Types button is in the acti-vated state only:

• if on the Options tab card for the Profi le Settings criterion the Model Type Dependent Check Profi le check b0x is activated,

• an d if in the Model Types list box the S tanda rd Se t t ings are selected.

Function of the button: When clicked, the settings of the r e sp ec t i ve c r i t e r io n will be transferred to all other defined model types—unlike the analog (big) Apply values to al l other model types button at the bottom of the Modify Profi le window (Profile Editor), transferring the settings for a l l criteria to all other model types.

4 . C R I T E R I A


o




a

s

d

f

a d

Move to the right buttons

With these buttons you can transfer elements names or texts from a text box or a list box into the right box (values list) to make them ac t i ve .

With the button o o ne highlighted name or entered text can be moved, with the double arrow button d a l l elements names/texts (highlighted or not highlighted) are moved.

ATTENTION:

Texts that are entered or names that are highlighted only in the l e f t box, but not moved in the values list, have no e f f e c t for the respective criterion.

Only when transferred into the r i gh t box—the values list, element names or texts will be applied.

s f

Move to the right buttons

With these buttons you can transfer element names or texts out of the values list to make them inac t i ve .

With the button a o ne highlighted name or text can be moved, with the double arrow button d a l l element names/texts (highlighted or not highlighted) are moved.

4 . C R I T E R I A


Specific Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria

g h

g Maximum number of points to check l ist box

In this list box, it can be selected how the number of control points per segment is to be defined. The following methods are available:

Method: Fix number of points

Internal discretization points

Order

Number of used points per segment:

To be specified by the user in the Fix number of points spinner box.

Q-CHECKER analyzes for the check the CATIA discretiza-tion points (which depend on the accuracy settings—Model Dimension, etc.). The number of points some-times can be very high. The number of discretization points in general depends on curvature degree, extens-ion etc. of the elements—more complex elements have a greater number of points.

The number of calculation points will be defined by the polynomial degree n of the element to be analyzed: z = n + 1

Accuracy: When using a small number of points, the check speed is high, but the analyze accur-acy will decrease. When using a great number of points, checking is exe-cuted slower, but accuracy will increase.

The software adapts the accuracy to the geometry of the elements. Check speed may decrease.

Accuracy depends on the polynomial degree.

4 . C R I T E R I A


Method: Fix number of points

Internal discretization points

Order

Notes:

• The order option is not available in all Number of discretization points list boxes (criteria depend-ing).

• This option makes sense only for polynomial curves and surfaces. If the user has selected this option for curves and surfaces of other types, Q-Checker will switch automatically to the Discretization points option.

h Fix number of point spinner box

If in the Number of Points to check list box the Fix number of points option is selected, in this spinner box the number of control points is to be specified. The specified value applies for every parameter direction.

If in the Maximum number of points to check list box the Discretization Points or the Order option is selected, speci-fying numeric values in this spinner box takes n o e f f e c t .

T I P :

Which method should be used to select control points and how many control points should be selected for the elements to check—this depends on the aim of the check, on the elements to check and— first of all—on what the user considers to be an error.

A general rule to observe when specifying the number of control points is the following: • The higher the number of control points is, the more precise the check

result will be, but also the longer the checking will last. • Thus check only as precisely as required.

A too great accuracy could result in error reports for elements which have tolerable deviations.

For the settings there can be no rigid rule—they must be adapted to the current requirements. An appropriate method how to proceed could be, when an error check did not give a result, to increase the number of control points for the subsequent check.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.3 Options

4.3.1 Profile Settings

Options—Profile Settings

Description:

In the MODEL.type file (see on page 379—6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles) the administrator can define conditions, allowing to recognize automatically different model types (e. g. Space model, drawing model, hybrid model). When a check is performed with the Model Type Dependent Profile option activated (cf. chapter 4.3.1 Profi le Settings on page 72), the information of this file is analyzed. On the basis of predefined character strings in the model name or in the comment or on the basis of certain other characteristics of the model (details see on page 379 section 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles) it will be recog-nized of which type is the model. Depending on the model type, to the defined check profile an additional profile will be appended, that can add or eliminate criteria as well as modify parameters of check criteria.

The number of model types and names can be chosen freely by the administrator. Note that during the batch run, only standard profiles can be used, as user profiles are not al-lowed. The model type names are contained in the l ist box which is opened in the Edit Criterion window, when the Model Type Dependent Profi le button is activated.

For detailed description of the MODEL.type file and of the use of model type depending profiles see chapter 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles on page 379.

q

Parameters:

q Activate the Model-Type Dependent Profi le option, i f you want the model types to be recognized automatically by the means of the profi le predefined by the administrator. When this option is activated, the Model Type l ist box

(see page 62) also is activated.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.3.2 Save Settings

Options—Save Settings

Description:

This option is provided to give the user the possibility to save the current model before writing the check report file and the external check seal. This guarantees that the stored model corresponds to the external check seal file and the corresponding check sums.

When the check is run in interactive mode, a warning is edited that the model will be saved and the existing model will be overwritten.

When the analyze window is closed, first the internal check seal will be written, then the model will be saved, and then the external check seal will be written.

In batch mode, the procedure is the same.

q

Check Parameters:

q Save check box

If this check box is activated, the current model will be saved before writing the check report file and the external check seal.

T I P :

This option is recommended to be ac t i va t e d in case if an external check seal is to be written (see chapter 4.3.7 Check Seal Creation on page 81).

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.3.3 Check Settings

Options—Check Settings

Description:

The test settings define the evaluation of the tested model, and how the Q-CHECKER behaves if it comes across a K.O. criterion.

q w Check Parameters:

q This sets whether the Q-CHECKER aborts immediately when it comes across a cri-terion that was evaluated with K.O. or if it finishes the current processing group.

w The model evaluation either occurs via the highest grade of violated criteria, or via the total sum of violated criteria

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.3.4 Selection of Elements

Options—Selection of Elements

Description:

With this option the total quantity of elements to be checked can be limited to subsets.

q we r t y u i o

a s

d

Check Parameters:

qw

Element Selection Set Name Combo Box Apply Input Button

The combo box offers the following possibilities: • selecting an e x i s t ing element selection set—

to do so, open the list and select there the set;

• entering the name of an e x i s t ing element selection set or an element selection set t o b e c r e a t e d . To conclude the entering of the name, press the key on the keyboard or the + button w.

When a name of an element selection set has been selected or new name has been entered, this name appears on the top of the frame under the list box q. This activated (new or having existed before) element selection set now can be adapted.

The number of the element selection sets that can be created in Q-CHECKER is not limited, but, for reasons of manageability (to keep the overview of the sets), it should not be too big.

w e

4 . C R I T E R I A


e Delete Element Selection Set Name button

When this button is pressed, the element selection set, selected in the combo box q, will be deleted.

NOTE:

Once an element selection set is deleted, it can not be restored.

rtyui

Define her which elements are to be checked:

r Workspace list box: Check all workspaces or only the current workspace.

t Set, View, Draft list box: Check all sets, views and drafts or only the current sets, views and drafts.

y SHOW/NOSHOW list box: Check the SHOW area or both SHOW area and NOSHOW area.

u PICK/NOPICK list box: Check the PICK-area or both SHOW area and NOPICK area.

i Layer-Filter list box: Use the current filter or do not use a filter.

o Multi-Select text box:

Here a selection of multiple elements can be made, using Multi-Select commands (e. g. *SPC+*DRW-*PT).

a Layer text box:

Here a selection can be made by entering layer numbers (e. g. 1,3,5,8-50,58)

s Ignore Elements on Library Details check box

If this option is activated, elements of library-details will not be checked.

d Consider only views and elements of the current draft check box

Activate this option when checking overlay models with activated DRAFT ON option in order to avoid a general error (CATIA does not allow to change the draft, as long as the DRAFT ON option is active). When the “Consider only …” option is activated, generally only views and other elements will be checked that lie on the draft of the c u r re n t model. (Generally means: for a l l element selection sets—independently of the settings for the different element selection sets in the „Set, Views, Drafts” list box t).

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.3.5 Model Type Default Element Selection

Options—Model Type Default Element Selection

Description:

This option is provided to assign an element selection set to a model type, whereupon this element selection set will be used as the s t an d ard element selection set for the respective model type.

q

Check Parameters:

q Element selection set l ist box

Select in the list the element selection set required for the current model type.

For explications of standard elements see chapter 4.2 on page 66.

S t e p s

P re c o n d i t io n : A respective element selection set must be defined (see chapter 4.3.4 Selection of Elements on page 75).

To assign an element selection group to a model type proceed as follows:

(1) Select in the check profile editor in the model type list box the model type (see page 62).

(2) In this criterion select in the element selection set list box q the required element selection set.

Further steps are not necessary, after selecting the element selection set the assignment effected is immediately saved.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.3.6 Check Seal Validation

Options—Check Seal Validation

Description:

This option verifies the existence of a check seal and its validity. To identify the validity of a check seal, the check sums, stored in the model, are checked over.

If there is a valid check seal, a window with a correspondent message is opened. The user can close this window, but he can also start a new Q-CHECKER check run in spite of the existence of a check seal.

For the case of an invalid check seal, one of three possible subsequent actions can be chosen.

(See also general information about check seal in section 1.6 Check Seal on page 16; section 3 Validation of External Check Seals on page 59.)

q

w e r t y u i o a

Check Parameters:

q In this list box select which check seal is to be checked:

• the check seal in the MODEL-COMMENT

• or the check seal situated the UDB (User Defined Block).

4 . C R I T E R I A


w In this list box select which action is to be taken, when a check seal is l a c k ing . The available actions are:

• Start a complete n e w check or • (1) set a mark that the check seal is invalid

or (2) stop checking and assign the Interrupt Condition Violated assess-ment (which of the two actions (1) and (2) is available depends on the administrator’s pre-setting).

e to o

Specify here:

• which parts of the check seal (e, r, t) are to be used for the check seal validation (by activating the check boxes), and

• which action is to be taken, when one of the parts of the check seal is inva l id (by selection in the list box).

In this list boxes select which ac t io n is to be taken, when the check seal is in -va l id . Actions can be started in the following cases, when the following model fea-tures have been changed:

• e the number of element types and elements in the model.

• r the value of the MODEL DIMENSION • t the value of the INTERSECTION PROJECTION tolerance

• y the value of the IDENTICAL-CURVES-tolerance

• u the INFINITY value

• i the contents of the prescribed check profile

• o t ime s t amp deviation (to get a valid check sum, the model is to be saved within the space of time, defined in the spinner box a).

Possible subsequent actions, started in case of an invalid check seal:

For the case of an invalid check sum, for each of the check seal options there is a choice between three different actions, that are started automatically:

(1) Subsequent action: W arn ing

A message window is opened indicating the invalidity of the check sum. There is no modification made on check seal and model assessment.

The check report (*.txt, *.html …) contains the model assessment of the initial check seal. No detailed listing of the criteria and faulty elements is edited.

4 . C R I T E R I A


(2) Subsequent action: S t a r t c o m p l e t e c h e c k r u n

If the check sum is invalid, recheck is started automatically. A ne w c he c k sea l will be created.

The check report contains all infor-mation about the criteria and elements.

(3) Subsequent action: S e t c h e c k s e a l t o i n v a l i d

If the check sum is invalid, the model assessment will be set to “Invalid check seal”.

In the check report the Invalid check seal model assessment is edited. No detailed listing of the criteria and elements is edited.

a Define here the time interval for o.


NOTE:

When a check seal verification results in an invalid check seal, the text of the initial model assessment (e. g. MODELL O.K.) is no t changed .

To evaluate a model, use the check report.

If a v a l i d c h e c k s e a l is found, the following message window with the information of the check seal is opened:

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w

q Start check run in spite of the existence of a valid check seal.

w Close the message window.

NOTE:

To use the check seal in the Model–Comment, the parameter qchecker.CHECK_SEAL_COMMENT in the QCHECKER.par file must be activated. To use the check seal in the UDB, the parameter qchecker.CHECK_SEAL_APPLICATION in the QCHECKER.par file must be activated.

4.3.7 Check Seal Creation

Options—Check Seal Creation

Description:

This option allows to generate other check seals than defined in the QCHECKER.par file.

(For check seal va l id a t io n see: internal check seal—chapter 4.3.6 Check Seal Validation on page 78; external check seal—chapter 3.Validation of External Check Seals on page 59.)

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r

Check Parameters:

q Activate this option to make operant the settings of the Override options w, e, r. If the option q is not activated, check seals will be created as in the QCHECKER.par file defined.

wer

By activating this Override options (one option or several) it is possible to define, ind e p e nd e nt l y from the settings of the QCHECKER.par file, which of the check seals is to be created or not created—the check seal in the document description w, the check seal in the root feature e, the external check seal r (XML file).

Parameters:

• YES—the check seal will be created,

• NO—the check seal will not be created,

• STANDARD/EXTENDEND (option e)—a check seal will be created with standard or additional information.


T I P S : • The convenience of the Create Check Seal option is the independence

from the settings of the QCHECKER.par file. The user can alternate the check seal use simply by changing the check profile; he does not have to change the settings in the QCHECKER.par file for that purpose.

• Use the Check Seal Creation option if the Check Seal Validation option is activated to make sure that in case of a lacking check seal a new check seal is created.

• Use the check box q to make the settings of the options w, e, r temporarily inactive—although inactivated, the settings will be main-tained, they are not to be entered again after reactivating.

• In case that an e x t e rna l check seal is to be created, activate the Save Settings option on the Options tab card too (cf. chapter 4.3.7 Check Seal Creation on page 81. Reason: For the creation of the external check seal, the check sum of the saved model is needed. Any changes on the model would make the check seal invalid.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.4 Batch Criteria

4.4.1 Parameter for Batch Criteria

Some healing actions can only be carried out during batch operation, due to missing CATIA

interfaces. The qchecker –b run is not meant by batch operation. Batch operation is the carrying out of jobs, such as e.g. CATCLEAN runs, where a CATIA-UTILITY has to be accessed. These utilities have the property of exclusively being able to access stored data sets.

Besides CATCLEAN, a batch run also offers the examination of SOLID-UPDATE capability. Healing cannot be offered in the analysis mode, as these criteria have to access stored data sets.

The healing can be executed only if the check run with healing is started.

q

w e

r

t

Check Parameters:

q With this list box the order is to be determined, in which the batch processes of the healing mode will be started. To do so, mark the names—CATCLEAN, SOLID UPDATABLE and CATDRAW—and move them up or down.

w In this list box can be selected if for the check run

• the save d version of the current model should be use d ,

• the currently active model should be save d ,

• the currently active model should be save d t e mp o ra r i l y and deleted after the check run.

4 . C R I T E R I A


NOTE:

To be able to use the Save current model temporari ly option, the following CATIA PTF must be installed: • UH04706 (IRIX), • UH04707 (SUN), • UH04708 (HPUX), or • UH04709 (AIX).

If the PTF is not installed, CATIA will abort during check run with an abend (error U999).

R e aso n : Since release 1.9.2, Q-CHECKER SUPPORTS checking batch criteria for models which are loaded into CATIA from VPM or LCA. With the aid of the routines of this PTF, Q-CHECKER is able to keep the link to the PDM system.

e If in the list box the Save current model temporari ly option is selected, the

model file or path must be entered, where the model should be stored temporarily.

In case of using the healing functionality of Q-CHECKER for the batch criteria, the temporarily stored model will be reloaded into CATIA and then deleted from the disk.

r Every utility run ends with the storing of the modified data. Here it is to be defined if the stored model should be overwritten or if a renamed model should be created.

When renaming, you have to enter

• the position of the first sign of the string and

• the string itself for the name modification.

t Select in this list box whether the initial data may be overwritten or not.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.4.2 Catclean Category 1

Batch Criteria—Catclean Category 1

Description:

The criterion CATCLEAN Category 1 examines the model for faulty elements that cannot be repaired. These errors can occur while altering the model dimension.

General:

All of the parameters that have been set for the check run are valid for Category 1, Category 2 and Category 3.

Healing can only be done during the check. Healing is not available during analysis.

q w

e


Healing Functionality:

The parameters of Catclean Category 1 are valid.

q If this option is activated, faulty elements will be deleted.

w … faulty elements will be transferred to layer X.

e … faulty elements will be transferred into group Y.

4 . C R I T E R I A


NOTE:

A correction is only possible during the check run. In the analyse panel after the check no healing can be executed.

T I P :

For the first test run, we recommend to set the settings to “without correction“ (for category 1), “without correction“ (for category 2), “correct/ pack“ (for category 3), using the parameter “save under the same name“.

If errors occur in category 1 and/or category 2, then execute a second “rename“ run, setting the following parameters: • for “rename model as of position“ x • for “rename model with“ xyz .

For this set category 1 to layer X and category 2 to “modify”. After this compare the models and delete the elements on Layer X.



Description:

The CATCLEAN Category 2 criterion tests the model for faulty elements that can be repaired.

q w

e

Check Parameters:



4 . C R I T E R I A



The universal healing parameters of Catclean Category 1 are valid.

q If this option is activated, faulty elements will be modified.

w … faulty elements will be added to Layer X.

e … faulty elements will be added to Group Y.

NOTE:




Description:

The CATCLEAN Category 3 criterion reorganises the elements. This is an equivalent of the CATIA function ERASE PACK.

q

Check Parameters:




The general healing parameters of Catclean Category 1 are valid.

q If this option is activated, a reorganisation of all of elements will be executed.

4 . C R I T E R I A


NOTE:


4.4.5 Solid Updateable

Batch Criteria—Solid Updateable

Description:

This criterion checks the update ability of solids. Before updating a solid, it is appropriate to check his update ability as data inconsistency could cause a CATIA crash or an abend of the of update run. This would result in an abend of the check operation.

q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q w

Show + NoShow list box Pick + NoPick l ist box

Specify here solids with which status are to be checked on their update ability.

e Pack model … button

If this button is pressed, after every SOLID-UPDATE a PACK-MODEL routine is started. This routine will delete all elements that have been added to the solid by CATIA during Solid-Update and that are no more needed. This allows to reduce the size of the updated model. The PACK MODEL option should be used if on the respective computer the available disk space is limited. A general recommendation to use this option can not be given because the PACK-MODEL routine may delete also elements that the user wants to maintain.

4 . C R I T E R I A




r In case of a successful check on solid update ability a forced update can be executed.

NOTE:

This healing is possible only during the check run. After the check run in the analyse window no healing can be executed.

4.4.6 View not updated

Batch Criteria—View not updated

Description:

This criterion checks whether all Auxview2 views are updated.

q



q All views will be updated.

NOTE:


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.5 Pre-Processing

As different companies use different model standards, the direct inspection of model structure would inevitably lead to error messages, whenever the companies would ex-change data. In particular this refers to the placement of the geometry elements on differ-ent layers, or the definition of the color table. In addition models may contain solids, which may have been modified, but not updated. Or, a model might contain details from which do not have any instance in any other workspace.

In order to avoid these problems it is necessary to “clean” a model during pre-processing. The Execute button activates that function.

4.5.1 Reframe the Current Screen

Pre-Processing—Reframe the Current Screen

Description:

If this criterion is processed, the model representation is adjusted to the screen window (i. e. centered and zoomed in or to a size filling the screen. As an additional option, the representation mode can be changed.

q

Check parameters:

q Switch workspace l ist box

This list box provides different facilities to predefine the display mode:

• Current Workspace (no switching): The display mode is not changed and remains as it has been predefined in the model, the model is solely zoomed and centered in order to fit the screen.

• MASTER: Space window The display mode will be set to 3D.

4 . C R I T E R I A


• MASTER: DRAW window The display mode will be set to 2D.

• MASTER: MASTER: Horizontally split SPACE-DRAW window The display mode will be set to horizontally split window, the upper part display-ing 3D, the lower part 2D.

• MASTER: Horizontally split DRAW-SPACE window The display mode will be set to horizontally split window, the upper part display-ing 2D, the lower part 3D.


4.5.2 Analyze Inertia of Solids

Pre-Processing—Analyze Inertia of Solids

Description:

This pre-processing criterion calculates the inertia of solids and stores the results of this analysis (it is the same action executed as when the CATIA functions SOLID + ANALYSE + SELF + INERTIA are used).


4.5.3 Force Update of Solids

Pre-Processing—Force Update of Solids

Description:

An edited model may have subsequently been modified in regards to its Boolean opera-tions or its parameters. If, after such a modification, no update of the solid has occurred, then the modifications will be stored in the solid’s history, however, they will not appear in

4 . C R I T E R I A


the displayed solid. This can lead to mistakes and problems when using the model for processing.

Another reason for a general solid update can be the change of a version, for which the calculation algorithms have been altered internally. If this criterion is activated, Q-CHECKER will update the whole solid.


4.5.4 Set Color Table

Pre-Processing—Set Color Table

Description:

The model standards for the color tables may differ between different firms, what can create problems when exchanging models. This criterion offers the possibility to replace the color tables of the model by color tables that match the requirements of the receiving firm.

q

Check parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for the color table (filename: *.color).


4 . C R I T E R I A


Administration:

In order to extend the list, the system administrator must create a new COLORTABLENAME.color file in the installation directory .../admin. The new file ap-

pears automatically in the list at the next start. The numbers 0 – 125 are the assigned colors in this file. This is accomplished with the assignment of red, green and blue from 0 – 15. Numbers that have not been assigned a number maintain their preset color. The

numbers 0 – 5 that are identical to the numbers 133 – 138, represent the background colors in DRAW, background color in SPACE, frame color, highlight color, LOWINT color and menu color. The SAMPLE.color file is provided by Q-CHECKER as an example.

NOTE:

If the check run is executed is running in batch mode and the current model has a color table, then the table will not be replaced.

4.5.5 Layer-to-Layer Transferring of Element Types

According to Firms Rules

Pre-Processing—Layer-to-Layer Transferring of Element Types According to Firms Rules

Description:

This criterion allows the layer-to-layer transferring of geometry elements from the layers, specified in the specifications of a firm number 1, to the layers, specified in the specifications of a firm number 2.

q

w

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q The configuration files can be selected from the appropriate list for the direction of the conversion of standards (from ... to …).



w Elements, which could not be allocated, as they were not in the receiving layer table, will be put onto the layer (numerical entry).

4.5.6 Delete 3D Texts

Pre-Processing—Delete 3D Texts

Description:

This criterion deletes the 3D-texts which are created with the CATIA function TEXT. At this it will be differentiated between element ID texts and manual texts. As 3D-texts are always linked to CATIA elements, the element types can be selected whose 3D-texts will be deleted.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q It can be chosen if

• only element identifier texts will be deleted,

• only manual texts will be deleted, or

• all texts will be deleted.

w Selection of the element types, whose 3D-texts will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A



For explications of element groups see chapter 6.2 on page 362.

4.5.7 Set / Reset Ghost Attribute for

Parents of Solids

Pre-Processing—Set / Reset Ghost Attribute for Parents of Solids

Description:

With this criterion the parent elements of solids can be set invisible (GHOST-attribute is set) or visible (NO-GHOST-attribute is set).

q

Check Parameters:

q Select in the list:

• the Set to GHOST option if the parent elements must be invisible o r

• the Set to NO GHOST option if the parent elements must be invisible.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.5.8 Publish Solids

Pre-Processing—Publish Solids

Description:

This pre-processing criterion publishes all solids.

To ensure a cross-model use of solids, the solids must be published. If they are not pub-lished, the solid is visible in the sessi0n, but it can not be imported in an other model (IMPORT SOLID). The reason is that in the session no solid address exists. The solid address is created only after publishing.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6 Internal Data Consistency

The model is examined concerning its consistency according to the current PROJECT file, which can be chosen from a list of local PROJECT files. The information internal to the model regarding pattern, fonts and dimensions description is compared to the informa-tion stored in the PROJECT file tables.

4.6.1 Model Dimension

Internal Data Consistency—Model Dimension

Description:

The model dimension affects other model parameters such as tolerance for identical points or curves. If the original value for the model dimension does not coincide with the current company standard, then this can lead to problems regarding these parameters like in NC-definitions, during post processing.

q

Check Parameters:

q Entry of the model dimension that is to be tested (numerical value)


NOTE:

The subsequent changes to the model dimension value are to be regarded as very critical (see CATIA warning). Main-taining the correct parameters is from the beginning.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.2 Model Tolerances

Internal Data Consistency—Model Tolerances

Description:

The current model tolerances will be compared to the required ones. Large errors will occur should one or more of the values not coincide. Changing the tolerances leads to topology issues (the neighbouring surfaces will not have common boundaries).

Check Parameters:

See CATIA function STANDARD/MODEL:


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.3 Model Unit

Internal Data Consistency—Model Unit

Description:

The current scaling factor is compared with the adjusted here.

Check Parameters:

See CATIA function STANDARD/MODEL.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.4 Model Standards

Internal Data Consistency—Model Standards

Description:

The adjusted model standards are compared with the input values.

q

Check Parameters:

See CATIA function STANDARD/MODEL.



q If „Heal“ is activated, the model standards will be changed.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.5 Model Size

Internal Data Consistency—Model Size

Description:

This criterion checks whether the preset model size is exceeded.

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify the maximum model size (in Kbytes).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.6 Permitted Combinations of INDEX and DATA

Internal Data Consistency—Permitted Combinations of INDEX and DATA

Description:

This criterion is set to test whether the current values of DATA and INDEX are smaller or equal to a value set in a table.

q

Check Parameters:

q Add to the table on the right new INDEX/DATA combinations (or delete old combinations from the table).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.7 Consistency of Patterns in Current PROJECT Environment

Internal Data Consistency—Consistency of Patterns in Current PROJECT Environment

Description:

It might happen that the patterns used in the model do not coincide with the definitions in the current PROJECT file. These patterns cannot be displayed in the new environment— they can only be displayed under certain circumstances.

q w

e

r

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for the project environment (filename: *.prj).

w Patterns that are locked in the current environment are not shown as errors. This suggests that patterns may exist in the current PROJECT environment, but they may be “deactivated” (commented out). They may be displayed, but they cannot be selected when new patterns are being generated.



e The shapes which are required for the definition of form and location of patterns can be transferred to any layer. The shapes can be interactively re-allocated subsequently with the PATTERN functionality.

r The patterns found as errors will be replaced by the pattern NONE.

4 . C R I T E R I A


The system administrator has to start an IUA routine in an empty model using the /m CHKPRJ command, and enter a file name. This file will be stored in the admin

directory of the Q-CHECKER as <FILENAME>.prj and contains the data for the PROJECT file.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.8 Consistency of Dimensions and Texts in Current PROJECT Environment

Internal Data Consistency— Consistency of Dimensions and Texts in Current PROJECT Environment

Description:

When using models in a different CAD environment, the descriptions used for measure-ments and text in the model cannot coincide with the definitions in the current PROJECT file.

q w

e

r

t

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for dimensions and texts (filename: *.prj).

w Descriptions that are locked in the current PROJECT environment are not shown as errors. This means that the descriptions of the measurements and text may be pre-sent in the current PROJECT environment, but they can be “deactivated“ (e.g. com-mented out). They may be displayed, but they are displayed differently when new measurements and text are being created.



e The *DIM-and *TXTD elements can be transferred to any layer.

r The *DIM-and *TXTD elements can be assigned any color.

t These elements can be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.6.9 Consistency of Attributes in Current PROJECT

Environment

Internal Data Consistency—Consistency of Attributes in Current PROJECT Environment

Description:

When using models in a different CAD environment the attributes used for geometry elements in the model cannot coincide with the definitions in the current PROJECT envi-ronment. An evaluation of the attributes, like with the REPORTER function, is no longer possible.

q w

e

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for the attributes of the geometric elements (filename: *.prj).

w Attributes that are locked in the current PROJECT environment are not shown as errors. This means that the attributes may be present in the current PROJECT envi-ronment, but may be „deactivated“ (e.g. commented out). They may be displayed, but they cannot be selected when new attributes are being created.



e The attributes can only be deleted generally, as the application of attributes in conjunction with activities and classes is a relatively complex matter.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7 Norms and Standards

The model is examined with regard to its storage status, its layer allocation and its graphi-cal attributes for the different element types.

4.7.1 Saved Model State

In most cases, there are precise guidelines for the status of a released model during storage. These guidelines refer to the following conditions:

4.7.1.1 Non-allowed Last Modification Date of Document

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Non-allowed Last Modification Date of Document

Description:

This criterion checks whether the model has a not allowed date of last modification. The existence of a not allowed date of last modification is rated as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the comparison operator and the modification date.

The following comparison operators can be used alternatively: < | <= | = | >= | >

The = comparison operator does not need to be specified.

4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

To specify the date, the following formats can be used: • Y-M-D • D.M.Y • M/D/Y (The program recognizes the different formats by the separators.) One-digit numbers can be used without leading zero. The year numbers are specified as follows:

• 70 … 99 1970 … 1999

• 0 … 69 2000 … 2069 For explications of standard elements see chapter 4.2 on page 66.

4.7.1.2 Non Allowed CATIA Version and Release

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Non Allowed Catia Version and Release

Description:

This criterion checks whether the model last has been saved by a CATIA software, corresponding to the criterion settings for version, release and modification level. If these parameters in the model do not match the criterion settings, this will be rated as fault.

q

w

e

Check Parameters:

q Specify here comparison operator2 and version number1.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w Specify here comparison operator2 and release number1.

e Specify here comparison operator2 and modification level number1. 1 Number example for CATIA V4:

4. 2. 2

Modification level number

Release-number Version number

2 comparison operators:

The following comparison operators can be used alternatively: < | <= | = | >= |>

The = comparison operator does not need to be specified.

NOTE:

Version number, release number and modification level number are checked se p a ra t e l y of each other.


4.7.1.3 Identify Renumber

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Identify Renumber

Description:

The present criterion checks on the observance of the CATIA-internal naming conventions:

• Is there an asterisk at the beginning of the part IDs (e. g. *LIN1)?

• Is the sequence of the numbers in the part IDs, that CATIA attributes automatically to the elements, continuous (e. g. *LIN1;*LIN2;*LIN3, and not *LIN1;*LIN2;*LIN4)?

• Are 2D elements labeled (instead of names) with the blank sequence that is usual in CATIA?

The infraction of this naming convention can take place e. g. due to renaming by the user.

If the naming convention is infracted, the criterion is considered as violated.

q w

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Check only… list box

Select in the list box if the check should be executed for all elements (ALL) or only for the elements that have a part number, attributed by CATIA (AUTO ID).

w Ignore Elements on Library-Details check box

If this option is activated, elements of l i b ra r y -de ta i l s will no t be checked.


T I P :

This criterion has no healing function. To correct faulty part IDs, the CATIA function INDENTIFY | RENUMBER can be used. This function can be used with two options: • AUTO ID:

only part IDs will be corrected that start with an asterisk; • ALL:

the correction will be executed also for part IDs, that have no asterisk.

4.7.1.4 Current Workspace Must be *MASTER

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Workspace Must be *MASTER

Description:

This criterion checks if the active workspace is the master WSP.

q



q If „Heal“ is activated, the master WSP will be activated.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.5 Current Set

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Set

Description:

This criterion checks whether a specified set is active.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q The specification in this text box determines which set has to be the active one.



w If „Heal“ is activated, then the set selected in the option 1 is set active.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.6 Current Axis System

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Axis System

Description:

This criterion checks whether the preset axis system is active.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Enter in this text box the name of the axis system that must be active.



w If „Heal“ is activated, the axis system, defined with the text box q, is set active.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.7 Current Layer

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Layer

Description:

This criterion checks whether the correct layer is active.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Enter the number of the layer which must be active. This number can be between 0 and 254.



w If „Heal“ is activated, the layer, defined with the spinner box q, is set active.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.8 Current Workspace Layer-Filter

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Workspace Layer-Filter

Description:

This criterion checks whether one of the permitted Layer filters is current.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q It can be selected which filters are allowed to be current.



w If „Heal“ is activated, the selected Layer-Filter is set active.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.9 Current Working Mode

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Working Mode

Description:

This criterion checks whether the model has been saved in the SPACE or DRAW mode.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q The administrator can select which working mode should be active (DRAW or SPC).



w If „Heal“ is activated, then the selected mode will be implemented.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.10 Current Working Mode 2D or 3D

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Working Mode 2D or 3D

Description:

This criterion checks if the specified working mode 2D or 3D is active. If the working mode specified in the criterion is not active, this will be rated as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Working Mode list box

Select in the list box whether the working mode 2D or 3D must be active.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.11 Current Graphic Display Mode of the Model

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Graphic Display Mode of the Model

Description:

This criterion checks whether the correct display mode is active (NHR, HLR, SHD, HRD).

q

w

Check Parameters:

q With this list box, it can be selected which display mode of the 3D-geometry has to be active:

• NHR No Hidden lines Removed

• HLR Hidden Lines Removed

• SHD Shading Dynamic

• HRD Hidden lines Removed Dynamic



w If „Heal“ is activated, the display mode, defined with the list box q, will be set active.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.12 Current Draft

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Draft

Description:

This criterion checks whether the correct draft is active.

q

w Check Parameters:

q Input the identifier of the draft that should be the active one.



w If „Heal“ is activated, the Draft specified under q is set active.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.13 Current View

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current View

Description:

This criterion checks whether the correct view is active.

q

w e

Check Parameters:

q Input of the identifier of the view, that should be current.



w If „Heal“ is activated, the view entered under q is set active only on the active draft. This is possible only if the view indicated under q exists in the active draft.

e If „Heal“ is activated, the view entered under q is set active on any draft.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.14 Current Screen

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Screen

Description:

This criterion checks whether the correct mode of the screen is active.

q w

e r

Check Parameters:

q Selection of the mode which will be active. These are :

• SPACE window

• DRAW window

• Horizontally split SPACE/DRAW window. At this the SPACE window is on top of the DRAW window.

• Horizontally split DRAW/SPACE window. At this the DRAW window is on top of the SPACE window.

w Only cylindrical projection SPACE windows are allowed.



e If „Heal“ is activated, the screen will be set on the correct mode.

r If „Heal“ is activated, the screen will be set on the correct mode and the model will be reframed.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.1.15 Current Window Definition

Norms and Standards—Saved Model State—Current Window Definition

Description:

With the present criterion it is checked if a model is stored with a view corresponding to the values set in this criterion. If the view has values different from those defined in this criterion this will be rated as fault. The possible healing consists in correcting the view, applying the values defined in this criterion.

q

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Number of required windows and Window number to test spinners

Define with these spinners how many windows are allowed and which one of them (sequential number) is to be checked.

If the model has an other number of windows as it is defined here, this will be rated as fault.

NOTE: The sequential number of the window to be checked must within the range of the number of allowed windows. Otherwise in the analysis window an error message will be displayed.

w Check type of window list box

If this check box is activated, the type of window will be checked (i. e. the projection of the model).

e to u

Check boxes and spinner control for the displaying values

If the check boxes are activated, the respective display settings will be checked. The spinner controls on the left sets the values affecting the display, the ones on the right, the associated tolerances. If the check box is deactivated, the respective settings will be maintained; they are only deactivated.

Signification of the parameters:

• Scale: enlargement factor

• Origin: coordinates of the screen center point relating to the model origin point

• Normal vector: vector normal to the current image plane

• Vertical vector: vector of the current image plane directed upward

• Eye position for conical projection:

coordinates of the viewer’s position (camera point) (This option is activated only when the window type “Conical projection” is selected.)



i If the healing option is activated, the view will be corrected, applying the values specified in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P : To determine the values to specify for a view desired, you should first adjust manually the model, ensuring the required view. The parameters to be preset then can be determined by the means of checking the manually adjusted model with the Current window view criterion, using any arbitrary settings. The check report will contain the settings desired as error values (i. e. the current view-status after the manual adjusting is here output in form of numerical values). These values can be inscribed in the spinners of this criterion.

4.7.2 Texts

4.7.2.1 Selected Standard of TEXTD2 Standard

Norms and Standards—Texts—Selected Standard of TEXTD2 Standard

Description:

This criterion checks whether the standard, selected for 2D-texts of drawings complies with the standard specified in the criterion. The selection of the incorrect standard is rated as a fault.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Enter the name of the standard.



w If the „Heal“ option is activated, the standard will be set, which is specified in the text box q.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.2.2 Selected TEXTD2 Standard

Norms and Standards—Texts—Selected TEXTD2 Standard

Description:

This criterion checks the compliance with predefined TEXTD2 standards. The non-compliance of the standard settings with the settings of this criterion is rated as a fault.

q w e r

t

Check Parameters:

qwer

With the check boxes, activate the check options desired.

E xamp l e : With the „No scoring for text“ option it is checked, whether in the text standard settings no score option is activated (i.e. no underscoring [=under-lining], no scoring [= strikethrough], and no overscoring [= line over the text]). If in the text standard settings one of the scoring options is activated, this will be rated as a fault.



t If „Heal“ is activated, the standard settings will be set as defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.2.3 Selected Standard of TEXTD2 Element Attributes

Norms and Standards—Texts—Selected Standard of TEXTD2 Element Attributes

Description:

This criterion checks the attributes of texts of the elements in drawings on their compliance with the standard, specified in this criterion. The non-compliance of the text attributes of drawing elements with the given standard is rated as a fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Enter the name of the standard.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.2.4 Selected TEXTD2 Element Attributes

Norms and Standards—Texts—Selected TEXTD2 Element Attributes

Description:

This criterion checks the attributes of texts of drawing elements on their compliance with the settings in this criterion. If the formatting of the texts does not comply with these settings, this will be rated as a fault.

q w e r

t

Check Parameters:

qwer

With the check boxes, activate the check options desired.

E xamp l e : With the „No scoring for text“ option it is checked, whether no text is scored (i.e. underscored [=underlined], scored [= strikethrough], or overscored [=with a line over it]). If a text is scored, this will be rated as a fault.



t If „Heal“ is activated, the text formatting will be set as defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.2.5 Existence and Content of Texts

Norms and Standards—Texts—Existence and Content of Texts

Description:

The present criterion checks if prescribed standard texts (drawing and 3D-texts)

• exist, or if

• they match with other texts or with the model name, or if

• they comply with firms regulations.

For the checks, regular expressions are compared with the texts.

The precondition for finding the texts to be checked is the correct text ID.

The criterion checks V4-2D-texts of the following types: ET_2D_TEXT, ET_2D_TEXT_OLD, ET_2D_DIMENSION, ET_2D_DIMENSION_OLD and 3D-texts which are connected to 3D-entities.

q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for the standard texts (filename: *.textcontent).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.2.6 IGES-Conform Texts

Norms and Standards—Texts—IGES-Conform Texts

Description:

This criterion checks if texts with non-IGES-conform fonts are in the model. Allowed are only fonts according to ISO 1001-1003.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Check for more than on text-line.

w Check for the number of characters per text-line. For the maximum number of characters the value is entered here.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3 Comments/Names

The definition of the name rules are made in ASCII files. For each criterion a separate file exists in the directory “qchecker.1.x.x/admin”.

4.7.3.1 Model Comment

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Model Comment

Description:

This criterion checks whether the entries in the comment of the CATIA Model correspond with the administrator’s entries in the Q-CHECKER comment file.

q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for the model comment (filename: *.comment).


4.7.3.2 Model Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Model Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the model name of CATIA-Models complies with the prescriptions in a selected *.modelname file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.

The criterion provides the following check facilities:

4 . C R I T E R I A


• checking the complete name or its substrings on the compliance with naming conventions (using lists of regular expressions); when checking substrings, the check can be started at a predefined position or behind a keyword;

• checking the name on the existence of character strings not allowed.

• The check can be either case-sensitive or not case-sensitive.

NOTE:

The names are checked only on their fo rma l correctness, but not on the correctness of their content.

q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for model name (filename: *.modelname).


4.7.3.3 Element Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Element Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the element names comply with the prescriptions in a selected *.elementname file. The intent is to avoid special characters in element names like commas, back slashes etc. The presence of characters not allowed in the element name is rated as a fault. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.



4 . C R I T E R I A




NOTE:


q w

e

Check Parameters:

q Selection of Elements l ist box

Select for which elements the check is to be executed.

w Definition of the Element Name list box

Select the desired element name configuration file.



e Replace characters value l ist

Enter in the value list the characters to be replaced and their substitute characters.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.4 Solid Names Match Part Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Solid Names Match Part Name

Description:

This criterion checks if the names of the solids match with a special string of the model name. If only one solid is in the model, the solid name must be match exactly with the string of the model name. If there are some solids in the model, the string will be attached with an enumeration.

Therefore two keywords are in the check-profile (*.qcprofile) which can be edited with a text editor.

q w e r t y

u

Check Parameters:

qw

Position and Number of characters spinner boxes

Define the name string:

Specify the start position of the compared string inside the solid name.

Specify the number of characters used for the comparison.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e Ignore … check box

If this option is activated, all blanks in this string in the model name will be ignored.

E xamp le : A solid named ABCD[…] is compared with the model name A BCD[…] (underline stands for blank).

• If this option is deactivated, the check will find a difference between the names.

• If this option is activated, the blank will be ignored and solid name and model name will be considered identical.

r Check number suffix check box

If this option is activated, a number suffix of the solid name will be checked whether it is matching the CATPart name. (Example: 001)

t Separator text box

Enter here the character that separates the number suffix from the preceding name. (Example: Solidname_001)

y Number of characters spinner box

Specify here how many characters have the number suffix to be checked.


u If Heal is activated, all solids which do not match the naming convention will be renamed. If in the model are solids which names do match the string, but with numbering no continuous, healing will close the gap.

Example:

The specified name string is SOLID. In the model there are 4 solids: SOLID_001, SOLID_002, SOLID_004 and SOLID_005. Healing will rename SOLID_005 in SOLID_003.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.5 Window Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Window Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the window names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the WINDOWNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for window name (filename: *.windowname).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.6 Screen Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Screen Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the screen names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the SCREENNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for screen name (filename: *.screenname).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.7 Filter Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Filter Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the filter names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the FILTERNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for filter names (filename: *.filtername).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.8 Detail Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Detail Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the detail names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the DETAILNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for detail names (filename: *.detailname).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.9 Symbol Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Symbol Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the symbol names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the SYMBOLNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for symbol names (filename: *.symbolname).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.10 Draft Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Draft Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the draft names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the DRAFTNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

w

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for the draft names (filename: *.draftname).


4 . C R I T E R I A



w Replace characters value l ist


4.7.3.11 View Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—View Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the view names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the VIEWNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

w

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for view names (filename: *.viewname).



w Replace characters value l ist


4.7.3.12 View Name Must Match Draft Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—View Name Must Match Draft Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether defined constituents of view names match defined constituents of draft names. Nonconformance is rated as fault.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Concerning … list box

Select here wheter the match is required only for o ne view or for a l l views.

w Text boxes for the definition of name constituents

In the l e f t box, specify the requirements for the draft name which is used as comparison basis.

In the r i gh t box, specify the requirements for the constituents of the view names that have to be identical to the constituents of the draft name.

4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

For the name specifications regular expressions and capture expressions can be used.

• Example :

The draft name is D_1_XYZ. The view name must start with the letter V. on the 2nd position, the letter from the 1st position of the draft name must appear; on the 3rd position, the letter from the 3rd position of the draft name must appear, followed by any figure.

To specify that, in the l e f t box the following expression is to be written: ^([A-Z]).([0-9]+).* i. e. the draft name must have on 1st position one arbitrary letter, on 3rd position one or more arbitrary figures (after what an arbitrary quantity of any signs may follow).

In the r i gh t box, the following expression is to be written: ^V\1\2([0-9])+ i. e. the name must start with the letter V, then the sign from the 1st position of the draft name must follow, (the content of the 1st bracket term is taken over as capture), then the sign from the 3rd position of the draft name must follow, (the content of the 2nd bracket term is taken over as capture), one or several digits must follow.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.13 Set Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Set Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the set names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the SETNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for set names (filename: *.setname).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.3.14 Axis Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Axis Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the axis names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the entry in the selected *.axisname file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q w

e

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, only the axis names in the Master Workspace will be checked.

w Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for axis names (filename: *.axisname).


4 . C R I T E R I A



e All axes which do not meet the name convention are deleted.

4.7.3.15 Law Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Law Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the law names of the CATIA-Model corresponds with the

entry in the LAWNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

w

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for law names (filename: *.lawname).

4 . C R I T E R I A




w All laws which do not meet the name convention will be deleted.

4.7.3.16 Transformation Name

Norms and Standards—Comments/Names—Transformation Name

Description:

This criterion checks whether the transformation names of the CATIA-Model corresponds

with the entry in the TRANSFORMATIONNAME file. The non-compliance is rated as a fault.





NOTE:


q

w

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for transformations names (filename: *.transformationname).



w All transformations which do not meet the name convention will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.4 Workspaces

4.7.4.1 Detail Used in Details

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Detail Used in Details

Description:

The model is searched for details, which contain a further detail.

Check Parameters:


4.7.4.2 Unused Detail

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Unused Detail

Description:

The model is searched for symbols that do not have any instance.

q

w

e

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Here the detail names of the permitted details can be entered.

w If this button is selected, nested details are searched.



e If the button is activated, the unused details will be deleted.

4.7.4.3 Unused Symbol

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Unused Symbol

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model are unused symbols.

q



q Unused symbols will be deleted if the button is activated.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.4.4 Library Detail

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Library Detail

Description:

External details (from a library) will no more detected after a data exchange. Thus they are not represented. Reason for this is the fact that external details are not stored in the data record of the model. There is only a link to the library.

q w



q All library details that do not contain any other external details will be dropped. This means that the connection between detail and library is interrupted.

w All library details will be dependent upon the library.

4.7.4.5 Library Symbol

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Library Symbol

Description:

External symbols (from a library) will no more detected after a data exchange. Thus they are not represented. Reason for this is the fact that external symbols are not stored in the data record of the model. There is only a link to the library.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q



q All library symbols will be dependent upon the library.

4.7.4.6 Compact / Standard Dittos

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Compact / Standard Dittos

Description:

When inserting a COMPACT ditto, all elements that are in the ditto are represented on the active layer of the master workspace. If these elements of the dittos would be represented on their respective layer, this could bring an undesired representation with the use of layer filters.

q

w e

Check Parameters:

q Here the allowed structure of dittos can be selected.


4 . C R I T E R I A



w All standard dittos will be changed into compact dittos. The current layer will be taken for the dittos.

e All standard dittos will be changed into compact dittos. A fixed layer will be taken for the dittos.

4.7.4.7 Compact / Standard Symbols

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Compact / Standard Symbols

Description:

When inserting a COMPACT symbol, all elements that are in the symbol are represented on the active layer of the master workspace. If these elements of the symbols would be represented on their respective layer, this could bring an undesired representation with the use of layer filters.

q

w e

Check Parameters:

q Here the allowed structure of dittos can be selected.



w All standard symbols will be changed into compact symbols. The current layer will be taken for the symbols.

e All standard symbols will be changed into compact symbols. A fixed layer will be taken for the symbols.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.4.8 Identical Details

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Identical Details

Description:

The model is searched for identical details.

q

Check Parameters:



q All duplicate details will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.4.9 Identical Symbols

Norms and Standards—Workspaces—Identical Symbols

Description:

The model is searched for identical symbols.

q

Check Parameters:



q All duplicate symbols will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.5 Sets

4.7.5.1 Set Must Exist in *MASTER Workspace

Norms and Standards—Sets—Set Must Exist in *MASTER Workspace

Description:

This criterion checks whether sets exist in the *MASTER-Workspace Sets. The names for the sets that must exist are to be specified in the text box of the criterion. If one of the specified sets is missing, an error is reported.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Sets must be empty check box

If this check box is activated, the sets in the value list w will be checked on whether they are empty. If one of the sets contains element, this will be rated as fault.

w Set names value l ist

Specify here the names of the sets that must exist.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.5.2 Allowed Sets in *Master Workspace

Norms and Standards—Sets—Allowed Sets in *Master Workspace

Description:

The Master Workspace is searched for sets contained in it.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Specify the names of the sets that are allowed in the master workspace. For this specification regular expressions can be used.



w If „Heal“ is activated, all remaining sets are assigned to the indicated set. This set must be available in the list of the permitted sets.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.5.3 Empty Sets

Norms and Standards—Sets—Empty Sets

Description:

The model is searched for empty SETs.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Here the names of the empty sets can be entered, which are permitted in the model. For this specification regular expressions can be used.



w If „Heal“ is activated, all other empty sets will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.5.4 Only One Set in *Master Workspace

Norms and Standards—Sets—Only One Set in *Master Workspace

Description:

This criterion checks if there is only one set in the model.

q w



q If „Heal“ is activated, all sets are linked to the first set.

w If „Heal“ is activated, all sets are linked to the defined set.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6 DRAFTs / VIEWs

4.7.6.1 Only One Draft

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Only One Draft

Description:

This criterion checks if there is a draft in the model.


4.7.6.2 Only One View in Each Draft

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Only One View in Each Draft

Description:

This criterion checks if there is only one view in each draft.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.3 View Must Exist on Every Draft

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—View Must Exist on Every Draft

Description:

Checks whether a view exists on every draft.

q

w

e r t

Check Parameters:

q Here the view-names are input, which must exist in the model. For this specification regular expressions can be used.

w Here the draft-names are input, on which the above entered view must not exist. For this specification regular expressions can be used.

e It is checked if views have different background planes.

r Here the position of the view on the draft is set. This position is determined by the horizontal (H) and vertical (V) coordinates.

t Here the position tolerance can be checked.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.4 Copied View

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Copied View

Description:

This criterion checks whether views specified by the user are copied views (generated by the function DRAFT > COPY ). If this is not the case (when these views have been created by the function AUXVIEW > CREATE ), an error will be reported.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q View names value l ist

Enter here the names of the views to be checked. For the specification of the views names regular expressions can be used.

w Exceptions—draft names value l ist

Enter here the names of the drafts for which all types of views—copied and not copied—are allowed. For the specification of the drafts names regular expressions can be used.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.5 Draft / View Must Exist

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Draft / View Must Exist

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model exist definite drafts with views, having definite names. The nonexistence of the defined draft-view combinations is considered as a fault.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Specify the names of the drafts and their associated views that must exist in the model. For the name specification, regular expressions can be used.

w If this option is activated, on a l l defined DRAFTs o n e only VIEW with a definite name is allowed.

(With this check box; the DRAFT-VIEW combinations defined under can be r es t r i c t ed : While with option inactivated it is checked only the existence of definite DRAFT-VIEW combinations, with option activated, additionally, it will be excluded that a view name is used more than once. In this case, each of the defined DRAFT names is compared with each of the defined VIEW names.)


Example:

Let us suppose that in a model, there are several drafts, each with an empty view named „FRAME“.

If the model is checked with the option i nac t i va ted , the check assessment will be „OK“, because on each sheet, there is an empty view „FRAME“.

4 . C R I T E R I A


If the same check is made with the option ac t i va ted , the criterion will be considered v i o l a t e d , because, in this case, the empty view „FRAME“ is allowed to exist only on one of the sheets.

4.7.6.6 Empty View Must Exist

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Empty View Must Exist

Description:

This criterion checks whether on definite sheets obligatory empty views do exist. The non-existence of the prescribed views is considered as a fault.

q

w e

Check Parameters:

q Specify the names of the sheets and views that must exist in the model. For the name specification, regular expressions can be used.

w If this option is activated, on all defined DRAFTs one only view with a definite name is allowed.

(With this check box; the DRAFT-VIEW combinations defined under can be restricted: While with option inactivated it is checked only the existence of definite DRAFT-VIEW combinations, with option activated, additionally, it will be excluded that a view name is used more than once. In this case, each of the defined draft names is compared with each of the defined view names.)

e If this option is activated, on the draft only o ne view is allowed.

4 . C R I T E R I A



Example:

Let us suppose that in a model, there are several drafts, each with an empty view named „FRAME“.

If the model is checked with the option i nac t i va ted , the check assessment will be „OK“, because on each sheet, there is an empty view „FRAME“.

If the same check is made with the option ac t i va ted , the criterion will be considered v i o l a t e d , because, in this case, the empty view „FRAME“ is allowed to exist only on one of the sheets.

4.7.6.7 Empty Views

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Empty Views

Description:

This criterion checks if empty views exits in the model.

q

w e

r t Check Parameters:

q Here the names of the empty views are input, which are allowed in the model. For this specification regular expressions can be used.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w If this switch is activated, all transparency views are allowed.

e With this switch the empty view is allowed if it exists only in one draft. For example thus the empty view can be permitted in an empty model.



r If „Heal“ is activated, all empty views except the last view on the draft will be deleted.

t If „Heal“ is activated, all empty views will be deleted. If it is the last view, the draft will be deleted, too.

4.7.6.8 AUXVIEW Type Views

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—AUXVIEW Type Views

Description:

This criterion checks if the view is created with AUXVIEW.

q

Check Parameters:

q Here the view-names are input, which may be created with AUXVIEW. For this specification regular expressions can be used.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.9 Transparency Views

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Transparency Views

Description:

This criterion checks if transparency views exist in the model.

q

Check Parameters:

q Here the view-names are input, which may be transparent. For this specification regular expressions can be used.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.10 View Frames

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—View Frames

Description:

This criterion checks whether for the views the correct frame type is set.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the names of the views for which the allowed frame type can differ from the frame type specified under w. To specify the view names, regular expressions can be used.

w Specify here which frame type is the generally allowed.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.11 Drawing Frame/Header as DITTO

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Drawing Frame/Header as DITTO

Description:

This criterion checks whether in specified views one or several dittos (generally a drawing frame) with certain predefined properties (position, scaling factor, rotation angle etc.) exists. The non-existence of these dittos or the non-compliance with the settings for their properties is rated as a fault.

q

w

e r t

y

u

i o

a

s

Check Parameters:

q Enter the name of the view/views to be checked. Regular expressions can be used.

w Enter the name of the ditto/dittos. Regular expressions can be used.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e If this option is activated, only those dittos will be checked which are linked to a library detail.

r If this option is activated, it is checked if the ditto(s) specified with the boxes w, exist(s) on all views, specified with the boxes q. (If this option is not activated, existing dittos are checked on their conformity to the attributes specified in the criterion.)

t If this option is activated, the position of the dittos specified under q, is checked. (This position is related to the active axis system of the view.) For that purpose, enter here the required coordinates of the dittos (H–horizontal position, V—vertical position) and the tolerance values.

y If this option is activated, the scaling value of the dittos is checked. For that purpose enter the scaling factor and the tolerance value.

u If this option is activated, the rotation angle of the dittos is checked. (This angle is related to the active axis system of the view.) For that purpose enter the rotation angle and the tolerance value.

i If this option is activated, it is checked whether in the view is only one ditto. The existence of more than one ditto is rated as a fault.

oa

If this option is activated, the frame size is checked. For that purpose specify:

• in the spinner box o the position of the first character of the norm ID in the detail’s name (in our example the position of the letter “A” of “A4”);

• In the boxes a the allowed frame size(s). The frame size definition consists of the norm ID, the width (H) and the height (V). The characters are to be entered separated by commas. To separate the decimal places, the period (full stop) is used. Blanks are not allowed.

s If this option is activated, the position of one of the corners of the Bounding-Box in the detail will be checked. If the specified position of this corner is not observed, this will be rated as fault. The following specifications must be done:

• list box: Which corner of the bounding box is to be checked on its position? • spinner box: Specification of the required horizontal and vertical position. • spinner box: Tolerances to be applied for the horizontal and vertical position


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.12 Existence and Fil l ing of Attributes Assigned to Ditto

Norms and Standards— DRAFTs / VIEWs—Existence and Filling of Attributes Assigned to Ditto

Description:

This criterion allows to execute a complexe check for dittos. It is possible to check:

• for the existence of certain atributes and of the textnodes of these attributes

• for the values of these attributes

• for the names and the origin of the details underlaying the dittos

• character strings of the values—whether they match character strings of the model name or of the draft name.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t

y u i o a

s

d

f

g

h j k

l

;

2)

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Write information fi le check box

If this check box is activated, a control file will be created containing the overview of the checked dittos of the modell.

Exp lana t ion : Library yes/no – The detail is taken/ not taken from a library.

w Information fi le path text box

Here a file path must be specified where the info file is to be saved. Alternatively the path can be specified—after clicking one of the buttons on the right side—in the directory / DLName selection dialog box respectively.

If no directory is specified, the check will be aborted with a General Error message.

e Information fi le name text box

Here a name for the info file can be specified. If no name is specified by the user, the standard name Info.txt will be used.

If the list box contains no file name or contains a name that is still attributed to a file in the info file directory, and the option r is deactivated, the check will be aborted with a General Error message.

r Use model name as information fi le name … check box

If this check box is ac t i va t e d , as name of the info file the model name will be used, the file name extension will be txt . An entry in the Information fi le name text box e in this case will be not taken into account.

If this check box is d e ac t i va t e d , the default name Info.txt or an other name specified by the user in the text box e will be used.

t Allowed overwriting … check box

If this check box is ac t i va t e d , an existing info file may be overwritten. If this check box is d e a c t i v a t e d , in the Information fi le name text box e an other name must be entered than the names of the existing info files. If a name was entered that always has been attributed to one of the files in the info-file directory, the check will be aborted with a General Error message.

y Take into account … text box

Here an attribute name must be specified—the entry is mandatory. If no name is specified, the check will be aborted with a General Error message. –With this

4 . C R I T E R I A


attribute name the check will be restricted to dittos that have an attribute with this specified name.

7-( Check only … l ist boxes

With this list boxes the selection of the dittos specified in the text box y can be re-stricted even further according to their visibility, their pick-up status und their layer attribution (using a certain layer filter).

a Occurences check box and l ist box

If this check box is ac t i va t e d , a check will be executed for the number of the dittos on the different drafts. In the list box, it can be selected whether the number of dittos on each draft should be n=1 or n=1 . This means that, in case of ac t i va ted check box, it mus t e x i s t dittos with the attribute specified in the text box y (one or seve-ral dittos); in case of d e a c t i v a t e d check box it is also allowed that such dittos do no t exist. For the name specification regular expressions can be used.

s Name of detail box

In the value list the names must be entered that are allowed for the details under-laying the dittos (it will be checked whether the correct details are used). In case of an empty value list the dittos will not be checked for their details.

d Associated detail must be external check box

If this check box is activated, the details will checked whether they are taken from a library. En error will be reported when the details are taken not from a library.

f Attribute must exist—Attribute name text box

Here the names of the attributes may be specified that the dittos must have.

g Text node of attribute must exist—Attribute name text box

Here the names of the attributes may be specified for which—if they exist—a text-node must exist. (No error will be reported when an attribute that is specified in this textbox does not exist—to check the existence of attributes use the check f).

1b-z& Check only … l ist boxes

With these list boxes the check for text node existence specified in the text box g can be restricted even further according to the textnodes’ visibility, pick-up status und layer attribution (using a certain layer filter).

l Check attribute value text boxes

Here can be specified attribute names and the values that are allowed for these attributes. An error will be reported when an attribute has an other value than the value that is specified here. For the value specification regular expressions can be used.

; Check attribute against model name text boxes

Here it may be specified that the values of certain attributes are to be checked whether they contain character strings matching character strings of the mo d e l

4 . C R I T E R I A


name. On the screen shot a check is defined allowing to compare the characters 1-20 of the value of the MODEL attribute with a character string of the model name that starts at position 20 and has the same number of characters. In case of non-matching character sets an error is reported.

2) Check attribute against draft name text boxes

Here it may be specified that the values of certain attributes are to be checked whether they contain character strings matching character strings of the d ra f t name. On the screen shot a check is defined allowing to compare the characters 15-16 of the value of the SHEET attribute with a character string of the draft name that starts at position 20 and has the same number of characters. In case of non-matching character sets an error is reported.


4.7.6.13 Only One Axis in View

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—Only One Axis in View

Description:

This criterion checks if only one axis exists per view.

q

Check Parameters:

q Here the view-names are input, which may contain more than one axis. For this specification regular expressions can be used.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.6.14 View Scaling

Norms and Standards—DRAFTs / VIEWs—View Scaling

Description:

This criterion checks if only allowed scaling factors for views are used. The existence of not allowed scaling factors will considered as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify the scaling factors that are allowed for views. The scaling factors are specified by 2 positive natural numbers separated by colon (e.g. 1:2; 2:1; 1:2.5).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7 Elements

The model is examined for certain element types.

4.7.7.1 Conditional Feature Properties

Norms and Standards—Elements—Conditional Feature Properties

Description:

The present criterion checks features by the means of conditions. The features can be checked on:

• their properties—it can be prescribed that certain features must have or may not have certain properties (Example: Certain features must have a certain color or for certain features a certain color is not allowed);

• their quantity—features with certain properties must exist in a certain quantity or may not exist at all (options: zero times, n times, n to m times).

It will be rated as fault if in the model there are features with properties not allowed or the features exist in a quantity not allowed.

The check is executed on the base of the definitions in the selected *.conditional configuration file. With Q-CHECKER the SAMPLE.conditional file is delivered, which contains the commands for a standard check and also detailed instruction to define user-specific checks.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Select the desired *.conditional configuration file.

w Ignore Elements on Library-Details check box

If this option is activated, elements of l i b ra r y -de ta i l s will no t be checked.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.2 Permitted Element Types in Model

Norms and Standards—Elements—Permitted Element Types in Model

Description:

It checked whether elements are in the model, which are not permitted after firm-specific guidelines. Because certain elements can only be modified, deleted or applied with special licenses, it is necessary to check that only permitted elements are available.

q

w

e

Check Parameters:

q Permitted Element types

Determines which elements are permitted in the model.

w Non-permitted element types

Element types can be removed (e.g. LN ) that have been automatically set as “permitted” (e.g. SPC ).

4 . C R I T E R I A





e If „Heal“ is activated, the non-permitted elements will be deleted.

NOTE:

If no settings have been made under q, then nothing shall be permitted; this will always lead to an error message, as there are two axis systems (SPC+DRW) even in an empty CATIA model.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.3 Permitted Element Types in SHOW

Norms and Standards—Elements—Permitted Element Types in SHOW

Description:

This criterions check whether in the SHOW area elements are situated, which are not permitted there according to firm’s-rules (e.g. auxiliary elements or producing elements).

q

w

e

r

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Permitted element types l ist

Select which element groups, element types to be permitted in the SHOW area.

w Non-permitted element types l ist

Select individual element groups, element types etc. that have been selected with a global setting in the Permitted element types list q. The elements selected here will be not permitted.

Example: Declare not permitted LN from SPC.

e Element name exception text box

Enter in the text box the names of the elements that are allowed for SHOW, or a regular expression for allowed elements. To become operative, the name/regular expression is to be transferred in the right box.




r The radio buttons offer two possibilities of healing:

• S e t t o NOSHOW: The elements not allowed in SHOW, will be transferred to NOSHOW.

• D e l e t e : The elements not allowed in SHOW, will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.4 Permitted Element Types in NOSHOW

Norms and Standards—Elements—Permitted Element Types in NOSHOW

Description:

q

w

e

r

t

Check Parameters:

q Permitted element types l ist

Select which elements are permitted in the NOSHOW area.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w Non permitted element types l ist

Individual element types (e. g. LN), that have been set to „permitted“ (e. g. SPC) by other settings, can be declared non-permitted.

e Permit al l logically l inked elements (Parents) check box

If this option is activated, for the NOSHOW area also all logically linked elements are permitted, even when they are not specified in the list of the permitted element types.

r Element name exception box

Enter in the text box the names of the elements, that are allowed for SHOW, or a regular expression for allowed elements. To become operative, the name/regular expression is to be transferred in the right box.




t The radio buttons offer two possibilities of healing:

• S e t t o SHOW: The elements not allowed in NOSHOW, will be transferred to SHOW.

• D e l e t e : The elements not allowed in NOSHOW, will be deleted.

4.7.7.5 Logically Linked Elements (PARENTS) in SHOW

Norms and Standards—Elements—Logically Linked Elements (PARENTS) in SHOW

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are logically linked elements in SHOW.

q


4 . C R I T E R I A



q If „Heal“ is activated, PARENTS are added to NOSHOW .

4.7.7.6 Permitted Element Types in NOPICK

Norms and Standards—Elements—Permitted Element Types in NOPICK

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are elements in NOPICK.

q

w

e

r

Check Parameters:

q Permitted element types

The selection of which elements are permitted in NOSHOW can be made here.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w Non permitted element types

Individual element types can be removed (e. g. LN ) that have automatically been set as „permitted“ in other settings (e. g. SPC ).

e If this button is activated, also all logically linked elements in the NOSHOW are per-mitted, although they are not specified in the list of the permitted element types.


r If „Heal“ is activated, the elements from NOPICK are transferred to PICK or will be deleted.

4.7.7.7 Logically Linked Elements (PARENTS) in PICK

Norms and Standards—Elements—Logically Linked Elements (PARENTS) in PICK

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are logically linked elements in PICK.

q



q If „Heal“ is activated, the logically linked elements from PICK are transferred to NOPICK.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.8 No Isolated Faces/Surfaces

Norms and Standards—Elements—No Isolated Faces/Surfaces

Description:

Examine whether surfaces or faces are used as base geometry by other elements.

q w

Check Parameters:

q If this button is activated all isolated faces (mean: faces which are not used by a skin, volume or solid) are marked as defective.

w If this button is activated all isolated surfaces (mean: surfaces which are not used by a face) are marked as defective.


4.7.7.9 No Space Geometry Outside Working Area

Norms and Standards—Elements—No Space Geometry Outside Working Area

Description:

This criterion checks whether geometry elements are located totally outside of the working area. Elements which are located only partially outside will be not reported as faulty.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q Select the working area, which you want to be used as limit for the elements. You can choose between a Bounding Box (cuboid) and a Sphere. The working area is situated so, that the ac t i ve axis system lies in its center.

w Specify the s i z e of the element area.

e When the Check only Bounding Box option is activated, only the bounding box of the elements is checked and not the exact geometry. This will reduce the com-puting time.



r If the „Heal“ option is activated, the elements which are located totally outside of the area will be deleted.

4.7.7.10 Axis System Must Exist in *MASTER Workspace

Norms and Standards—Elements—Axis System Must Exist in *MASTER Workspace

Description:

The axis system(s) that have been entered in the list box must exist in the *MASTER-Workspace. If these prescribed axis systems do not exist, an error is reported.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q

Check Parameters:

q Enter in this text box the axis systems, the existence of which is mandatory.


4.7.7.11 No Unfixed Axis System

Norms and Standards—Elements—No Unfixed Axis System

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are unfixed axis systems in the model.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.12 Reverse Axis System

Norms and Standards—Elements—Reverse Axis System

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model an axis system exists that is left-rotating. Left-rotating axis systems are considered as fault.


4.7.7.13 Model Splitting SPACE/DRAW

Norms and Standards—Elements—Model Splitting SPACE/DRAW

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are SPACE and DRAW elements in the model.

q

w

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q If this option is selected, also 2D-Text is allowed in the SPACE model. These texts could be entered under point w using regular expressions.

w Input of the 2D-Text which is allowed in the model.


4.7.7.14 User Geometric Elements

Norms and Standards—Elements—User Geometric Elements

Description:

The User Geometric Elements enable graphic representation and graphic selection of application entities. They exist in DRAW and SPACE modes.

User Geometric elements are CATIA elements, which can be created exclusively by CATGEO routines. They are recognized in the general CATIA functions (ERASE, LAYER, SETS, TRANSFORMATION ). The integration of user geometric elements into CATIA is similar to the integration of DRAW symbol occurrences.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Allowed applications

The selection of applications which are permitted can be made here.


4 . C R I T E R I A



w If „Heal“ is activated, all non permitted applications will be deleted.

4.7.7.15 Fake Dimensions

Norms and Standards—Elements—Fake Dimensions

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are Fake Dimensions in the model and if they corre-spond to predefined texts/sings or text/sign patterns. The existence of fake dimensions in the model is rated as a fault. It is possible to admit exceptions.

q w

e

Check Parameters:

q w

Exception Field l ist box Exception character text box

With these two boxes, you can define texts that not will be considered as fake dimen-sion. In the Exception Field list box, you can choose between the following options:

• Nothing: No fake dimension is allowed.

• Simple Text (Main Value): The dimension itself is allowed to be a fake dimension.

• Before Text / After Text / Before and After Text:

A text before and/or after the dimension can be allowed.

If the one of the options “Simple text”, “Before Text”, “After Text”, or “Before and After Text” has been selected (and not “Nothing”), in the text box a text must be specified; regular expressions can be used.


4 . C R I T E R I A



e If „Heal“ is activated, one of two healing options can be chosen:

• Restore original value: The fake dimensions will be replaced by the original values.

• Delete: The fake dimensions will be deleted; the respective elements remain without dimension.

4.7.7.16 Isolated Dimension

Norms and Standards – Elements – Isolated Dimension

Description:

This criterion checks whether isolated dimensions are in the model. The existence of isolated dimensions is rated as fault.

q



q When the healing option is activated, isolated dimensions will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.17 Identical 3D-Dittos

Norms and Standards—Elements—Identical 3D-Dittos

Description:

The present criterion checks whether in a workspace there are two or more dittos, referencing the same detail and having the same position with identical scaling and rotation. If in a workspace such a second or yet another such ditto are found, they will be marked as faulty.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.18 Identical 2D-Dittos

Norms and Standards—Elements—Identical 2D-Dittos

Description:

This criterion checks if in a view there are two or more dittos, referencing the same detail and having the same position with identical scaling and rotation.

If in a view such a second or yet another such ditto are found, they will be marked as faulty.

q



q When the Heal check box is activated, the above mentioned second and further dittos will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.7.19 Specific Attributes Not Applied to Element

Norms and Standards—Elements—Specific Attributes Not Applied to Element

Description:

The present criterion checks if elements of certain types contain one or more specified attributes. Elements that do not have these attributes are considered faulty.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Select here the element types for which an attribute is to be specified as mandatory.

w Specify here for the selected element types the attribute names and the attribute type. Both are to be specified as defined by the user in CATIA. The name of the attribute type must be written as usual in CATIA.


NOTES:

• The attributes specified in the attribute text boxes w are applied to a l l elements selected in the element type list q. If there is the need to check several elements each on different attributes, the criterion must be c l o ne d (see section Cloning criteria on page 373 in chapter 6.4 CRITERIA.par and TCACriterionTable.exe—Criteria Management).

4 . C R I T E R I A


• If the setting CATSITE.PRJMODEL = TRUE is used, and you work in an other than the original environment, the check will result in an error. (If you want to maintain this setting, you have to go over to the environment where the model has been created.)

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8 Solids

4.7.8.1 Allowed Solid Primitives

Norms and Standards—Solids—Allowed Solid Primitives

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the in the model are solid primitives (base elements as cuboid, cone, prism, operations like fillet or translation), that are not allowed. The existence of solid primitives not allowed is rated as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Select here, which solid primitives should be allowed. For that purpose, shift the names of the respective solid primitives in the Allowed list box on the right, using the arrow buttons.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.2 Multi-Solid Part

Norms and Standards—Solids—Multi-Solid Part

Description:

In some companies, there are prescriptions demanding that in a 3D-model has to be only one solid. The present criterion checks whether there is more than one solid in the *MASTER workspace. If there is found more than one solid, an error is reported. But it is possible to define a list of allowed solids.

q w

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, *PIP-elements are also considered as solids.

w In this text box the names of elements can be entered that are allowed to be in the model. It is possible to use regular expressions for the element names.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.3 One Solid, at Least, in Part

Norms and Standards—Solids—One Solid, at Least, in Part

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the part there is at least one solid. The nonexistence of parts is rated as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, solids will be allowed only in the MASTER WORKSPACE.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.4 Solid Update

Norms and Standards—Solids—Solid Update

Description:

An edited solid may have subsequently been subjected to modifications in regards to its Boolean operations or its parameters. If, after such a modification, no update of the solid has occurred, then the modifications will be stored in the solid history, but they will not appear in the displayed solid.

q



q Solids that have not been updated will be.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.5 Unsmart / Smart Solids

Norms and Standards—Solids—Unsmart / Smart Solids

Description:

This criterion checks whether the solids in the model are smart or unsmart. The user can select, which type is allowed in the model. E. g. if smart is allowed, then all unsmart solids will be considered faulty.

q w

e r

Check Parameters:

q Type, which is allowed in the model Smart or Unsmart.

w If this Option is activated, imported solids will not be checked.



w The Exact Solids will be set into the structure indicated by point 1.

e The Exact Solids will be set into the structure indicated by point 1. If necessary an update will be done.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.6 Unused Primitives in Solid

Norms and Standards—Solids—Unused Primitives in Solid

Description:

Unused primitives are primitives which do not participate in the geometry of the solid. They may arise for example by splitting operations, where the whole primitive is cut off.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.7 Inactive Primitives in Solid

Norms and Standards—Solids—Inactive Primitives in Solid

Description:

There may be different reasons for a presence of inactive primitives in solids. Different design variants may be one reason (by activating/deactivating certain Primitive/Branches one can have different design options). Additionally primitives may be turned to inactive during an update, as the update would not occur otherwise. In these cases it is not advis-able to correct the model.

q w



q Inactive primitives are activated, solids are not updated.

w Inactive primitives are activated, solids are updated.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.8 Unresolved Primitives in Solid

Norms and Standards—Solids—Unresolved Primitives in Solid

Description:

Unresolved primitives are primitives, where incorrect definitions of geometry develop through Boolean operands.


T I P :

Examine whether unresolved primitives can be corrected.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.9 Missing Solid Construction History

Norms and Standards—Solids—Missing Solid Construction History

Description:

This criterion checks whether a complete description of Solids with the construction history (CSG-tree) exists. E xamp l e : Solids/Primitives, which are produced from a Volume or Mock-up Solids without construction history, will be declared as error.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.10 Unused Solid Construction Geometry

Norms and Standards—Solids—Unused Solid Construction Geometry

Description:

This criterion checks whether geometry elements, which have no effect on the Solid, are in the model.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q All elements are checked independently of the 1element selection.



w Unused Solid Construction Geometry will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.8.11 Shared Base Geometry in Solids

Norms and Standards—Solids—Shared Base Geometry in Solids

Description:

This criterion checks whether base geometry was used several times to produce solids.


4.7.8.12 Imported Solids

Norms and Standards—Solids—Imported Solids

Description:

This criterion checks whether imported solids are in the model.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9 Layers and Filters

4.7.9.1 Permitted Element Types on Layers

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Permitted Element Types on Layers

Description:

This criterion checks if on certain (predefined) layers only permitted element types are situated. (The assignment of definite elements types to definite layers gives the model a clear structure and improves the model handling). The information given in the following can be applied to element groups too.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w

e rt

y to o

as d

see y to o

f

r te

yu

oi

a s d

yu

oi

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:


Specify the elements to be checked. For the selection of elements, you can choose between the following options:

• S e l e c t i o n o f e l e m e n t s f r o m O p t i o n s F o l d e r : When this option is chosen, the check will be based on the definitions in Q-CHECKER’s Options folder. In this case you can check either the elements in the visible space (SHOW) only, or the elements in the visible and the hidden spaces (SHOW + NOSHOW) (Cf. chapter 4.3.4 Selection of Elements on page 75).

• or A l l E l e m e n t s : When this option is chosen, a l l elements, specified in this criterion, will be checked.

• or A l l e l ements no t l y ing on l i b ra r y de ta i l s : The check is executed for a l l elements, specified in this criterion, which are no t lying on library details.

w Check Electric Elements Check box

Additionally electric elements will be checked.

NOTE:

If this option is activated, the following CATIA product for the check opera-tion is necessary: ELD – Electrical Device and Support Modeling

Setting al lowed element types (above e to t) Setting not al lowed element types (below a to d)

ea • List box with all element types and element groups rs • Editable List of the allowed (or not allowed) element types and element groups

on selected layer td • Layer list with allowed (or not allowed) element types and element groups on

layers

Copying of layer blocks (y to o)

These tools allow fast copying of element type specifications from layer to layer—either copying of single layers or of layer groups.

y • Source layer block spinners Specify the layer block to be copied.

u • Target layer block spinners Specify the layer block where to paste the copy.

4 . C R I T E R I A


i • Step: Here the distance is to be specified between source layer block and target layer block. (Example: If the step is 5, the first of the layers to be copied will be copied from layer n to layer n+5. If the number of the layers to be copied is increased, the step is increased automatically to exclude overwriting of layers. By specifying a sufficient large target layer block and a step not no too large a mu l t ip l e copying of layers and layer blocks can be achieved. (Example: If selecting 2 source layers, the Step 2 and a target layer block of 10 layers, all layers of the target layer block will be filled out. If the step is increased to 5, in the target block only the layers 1-2 and 5-6 will be filled out.)

o • Copy button When clicking this button, the element type names will be copied from the selected source layers and pasted in the selected target layers.

T I P :

Simple method to copy the element type names of an individuallayer:

(1) Highlight the source layer.

(2) Position the mouse pointer on the target layer and right-mouse-click


For explications of element groups see chapter 6.2 on page 362. Healing Functionality:

f With the radio buttons you can select o n e of the options:

Transfer to f irst permitted layer; otherwise to f ixed layer:

• If an element is not lying on the appropriate layer, then it will be moved to the next valid layer where the element is allowed. If such a layer can not be found, then the element will be moved to the layer defined in the text box on the right.

Transfer to f ixed layer:

• If an element is not lying on the appropriate layer, then the element is shifted in every case to the layer defined in the text box on the right.

4 . C R I T E R I A


S t e p s :

To define the elements allowed on a layer and the elements not allowed on a layer, follow these steps:

(1) Select the layer in the list t or i.

(2) Verify in the list r or u which elements are allowed r or not allowed u on this layer.

(3) Add elements or delete elements. Elements to be added to a list can be selected in the list e or y. To add or delete elements/element groups use the arrow buttons.

T I P :

The most reasonable method to define elements allowed and not allowed is to allow with the boxes e, r and t element g ro up s , and to exclude from these groups ind i v idua l elements with the boxes a, s and d.

If, by mistake, with the lists e, r and t an element or an element group was allowed and with the lists y, u and i the same element or element group was excluded, this would result in e xc l ud ing this element or element group.

4.7.9.2 Elements in SHOW on Layers

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Elements in SHOW on Layers

Description:

This criterion checks whether the elements on specified layers have the SHOW state. If they have the NOSHOW state, an error is reported.

q w

e

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:


Specify the elements to be checked. In the list box, you can choose between the following options:

• S e l e c t i o n o f e l e m e n t s f r o m O p t i o n s F o l d e r : When this option is chosen, the check will be based on the definitions in Q-CHECKER’s Options folder. In this case you can check either the elements in the visible space (SHOW) only or the elements in the visible and the hidden spaces (SHOW + NOSHOW). (Cf. chapter 4.3.4 Selection of Elements on page 75).



w Specify the layers to be checked.

Rules:

• Several layer numbers must be separated by commas (e.g.: 1,2,5),

• series of layers must be separated by hyphen (e.g.: 1-5).

• -n means all layers up to and including the layer n . • n- means all layers from and including the layer n .

• - (hyphen) means all layers.



e If the Heal option is activated, all elements with NOSHOW state will be automa-tically—depending on the selected radio button—either deleted or set into the SHOW state.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9.3 Elements in NOSHOW on Layers

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Elements in NOSHOW on Layers

Description:

This criterion checks whether the elements on specified layers have the NOSHOW state. If they have the SHOW state, an error is reported.

q w

e

Check Parameters:






4 . C R I T E R I A


w Specify the layers to be checked.

Rules:

• Several layer numbers must be separated by commas (e.g.: 1,2,5),

• series of layers must be separated by hyphen (e.g.: 1-5).

• -n means all layers up to and including the layer n . • n- means all layers from and including the layer n . - (hyphen) means all layers.



e If the Heal option is activated, all elements with SHOW state will be automa-tically—depending on the selected radio button—either deleted or set into the NOSHOW state.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9.4 Logically Linked Elements (Parents) on Same Layer

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Logically Linked Elements (Parents) on Same Layer

Description:

This criterion checks whether logically linked elements are located on the same layer. The check is executed on the links between surface and face, between face and skin, as well as between face and volume. The layer allocation is checked on the base of the layer number of the child element that was created the last. E xamp l e : Faces which are not located on the same layer as the corresponding skin will be considered faulty.

q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q If this button is selected, the link between surface and face is checked.

w If this button is selected, the link between face and skin is checked.

e If this button is selected, the link between face and volume is checked.



r If „Heal“ is activated, the parent-element (e.g. surface) will be transferred on the layer of the children-element (e.g. face). E xamp le : If the points q and w are selected and healing will be performed the faces of the skin and all surfaces to the faces are transferred on the layer of the skin.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9.5 Names of Filter and Its Visible Layers

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Names of Filter and Its Visible Layers

Description:

This criterion checks whether the available filters correspond with the required filter list. The filter name and the layers in the filter must be congruent.

q w

e r

Check Parameters:

q Filename list box

Select here the required sample file for filters (filename: *.filter).

w Allow undefined fi lters check box

When this option is activated, filters that are not specified in the sample file will not be considered faulty.



e If the healing is activated, then missing filters are produced or unnecessary deleted.

r With the activation of this button an examination and a correction of the CATIA filters will be executed. Thereby the layers which are switched actively in the filter are com-pared and corrected with the firm-specific filter list.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9.6 Filters Which Contain No Entity in Their Visible Layers

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters— Filters Which Contain No Entity in Their Visible Layers

Description:

This criterion checks whether a visible layer of a filter definition contains elements. If no layer of a filter definition contains an element, then this filter is criticized.

q



q If „Heal“ is activated, all criticized filters will be deleted

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9.7 Layer-Filter on Views

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Layer-Filter on Views

Description:

This criterion checks whether to specified views layer filters are applied. An error will be reported if to the specified views the NON-LAYER filter is no t applied (i. e. if to the views filters are applied).

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the names of the views to which the check is to be applied.

NOTE:

As default value in the list the regular expression.* is inscribed, which causes that all views will be checked.

If this entry is deleted and no view name is specified, no check will be executed.



q If „Heal“ is activated, to the views the layer filter NONE is applied (in other terms: no filter is applied). Thus all layers belonging to the views become visible.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.9.8 Layer-Filter on Dittos

Norms and Standards—Layers and Filters—Layer-Filter on Dittos

Description:

This criterion checks whether Layer filters are applied to DITTOS.

q



q If „Heal“ is activated, to the views the layer filter NONE is applied (in other terms: no filter is applied). Thus all layers belonging to the views become visible.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10 Graphics

The criteria of the Graphics group check models for their standard settings and the graphical attributes of the different element types.

4.7.10.1 Selected Graphic Standard for DRAW Elements

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Standard for DRAW Elements

Description:

With this criterion, the current standard settings for DRAW elements are verified. See CATIA function STANDARD/DRAW ELT.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q For detailed instructions for this settings press the Criterion Help button.



w If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic standard of DRAW elements is changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.2 Selected Graphic Standard for SPACE Elements

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Standard for SPACE Elements

Description:

The current standard setting for SPACE elements is examined here. See CATIA function STANDARD/GENERAL.

q

w

Check Parameters:




w If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic standard of SPACE elements is changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.3 Selected Graphic Standard of Surfaces

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Standard of Surfaces

Description:

The current standard setting for surfaces is examined here. See CATIA function STANDARD/SPEC ELT/SURFACE.

q

w

Check Parameters:




w If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic standard of surfaces is changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.4 Selected Graphic Standard for Faces

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Standard for Faces

Description:

The current standard setting for faces is examined here. See CATIA function STANDARD/SPEC ELT/FACE.

q

w

Check Parameters:



w If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic standard of faces is changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.5 Selected Graphic Standard of Solids

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Standard of Solids

Description:

This criterion checks the standard settings for solids. See CATIA function STANDARD/SPEC ELT/SOLIDE.

q

w

NOTE:

If this criterion is activated, for the check run the following CATIA product is needed:

SOE – Exact Solids.

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, a pre-check will be executed for the presence of solids in the model.

If there are no solids in it, the criterion check as such will not be started and no CATIA solid license will be needed.

w For detailed instructions for this settings press the Criterion Help button.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.6 Selected Graphic Attributes of Surfaces

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Attributes of Surfaces

Description:

The attributes of existing surfaces are examined here. See CATIA function GRAPHIC/MOD SPEC.

q

w

e

Check Parameters:





4 . C R I T E R I A






e If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic attributes of surfaces are changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.7 Selected Graphic Attributes of Faces

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Attributes of Faces

Description:

This criterion checks the graphic attributes of existing faces. See CATIA function GRAPHIC/MOD SPEC.

q

w

e

Check Parameters:





4 . C R I T E R I A






e If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic attributes of faces are changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4.7.10.8 Selected Graphic Attributes of Solids

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Attributes of Solids

Description:

The attributes of existing solids are examined here. See CATIA function GRAPHIC/MOD SPEC.

q

w

e

Check Parameters:



• S e l e c t i o n o f e l e m e n t s f r o m O p t i o n s F o l d e r : When this option is chosen, the check will be based on the definitions in

4 . C R I T E R I A


Q-CHECKER’s Options folder. In this case you can check either the elements in the visible space (SHOW) only or the elements in the visible and the hidden spaces (SHOW + NOSHOW). (Cf. chapter 4.3.4 Selection of Elements on page 75).






e If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic attributes of solids are changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.9 Selected Graphic Attributes of Volumes

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Attributes of Volumes

Description:

The attributes of existing closed Topologies (VOLUME) are examined here. See CATIA

function GRAPHIC/MOD SPEC.

q

w

e

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:









e If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic attributes of volumes are changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.10 Selected Graphic Attributes of Skins

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Selected Graphic Attributes of Skins

Description:

The attributes of existing Topologies (SKIN) are examined here. See CATIA function GRAPHIC/MOD SPEC.

q

w

e

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:









e If „Heal“ is activated, the graphic attributes of skins are changed to the values defined in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.11 Element Color Not NONE

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Element Color Not NONE

Description:

This criterion checks whether the element color is placed on NONE.

q

w e

r

Check Parameters:

q In this list the elements can be selected, which may possess another element color than NONE.

w Enter the color numbers that are allowed. This means, that elements with this color number are allowed in the model and will not be set to NONE in case of healing.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e Selection of Elements l ist box







r If „Heal“ is activated, the element color is set to NONE. Thus to the elements the colors will be assigned, which are set under the CATIA function STANDARD.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.12 Color Mode by Set/Layer/Type/View

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Color Mode by Set/Layer/Type/View

Description:

This criterion checks the color allocation of the elements. The criterion provides two types of checks:

• check on the color allocation mode,

• comparison of the color of the elements and/or layers in the model with the settings of a modalcolor file.

q w e r

t Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, it will be checked whether the color settings, made with the function STANDARD/COLOR, correspond to the color allocation mode, selected here in the list box (color allocation by set, layer, type or view).

w If this option is activated, the color of the model layers is compared with the specifications of the modalcolor file, selected under r.

e If this option is activated, the color of the element types is compared with the specification of the modalcolor file, selected under r.

r Select a modalcolor file with a firm-specific color table.

If this button is clicked, an editor opens the modalcolor file selected. The administrator can modify this file and store it under the same or a new name.


4 . C R I T E R I A



t If „Heal“ is activated, the color mode and/or the color settings are set depending on the options activated in this criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.7.10.13 Empty Shapes

Norms and Standards—Graphics—Empty Shapes

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model are empty shapes. The existence of empty shapes is rated as a fault.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8 Geometry

4.8.1 Curves

4.8.1.1 Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG]

Geometry—Curves—Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG]

Description:

Curve ranges consist of one or more single curves with if necessary several internal seg-ments. At the borders of the segments and curves continuity is usually requested. These are point continuity (G0), whereupon normal continuity (G1) and whereupon curvature continuity (G2).

The most important consistency is the point consistency. It is the transition from curves and curve segments without gaps and/or overlays. An inconsistency would negatively affect subsequent operations, which rely on the closeness of curve ranges, especially after scaling and transfer into system environments with greater precision.

q

Check Parameters:

q The maximum distance between two segments that still allow the recognition of point consistency is entered here.


T I P :

Point inconsistencies within the tolerance for identical elements can be avoided by limiting the curves to each other. The extension of one or both of the elements is more advisable than filling in with a small part (mini-element).

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.1.2 Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT]

Geometry—Curves—Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NT]

Description:

The present criterion checks if the transitions between the curve segments of a curve are tangent-continuous. Transitions that are not tangent-continuous are considered faulty.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Angle (degree) greater than spinner

Use the spinner to specify the highest allowable value for the angle between the curve normals. If at a transition this value is exceeded, this transition will be considered tangent discontinuous.

w Angle (degree) less than spinner

Use the spinner to specify the maximal limit value for tangent-discontinuity faults. When this value will be exceeded, the tangent discontinuity at this transition will be considered deliberately used by the designer and not faulty.


T I P :

Correct the curves interactively,

or redesign the curves with identical normal conditions,

or fillet (inserting an additional curve), e. g. fillet two lines with a radius.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.1.3 Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS]

Geometry—Curves—Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-CU-NS]

Description:

Curvature consistency (with given point and normal consistency) means equality of the curvature radii at the point of contact, and therefore a harmonious transition of curvature between two curves. Curvature consistency is usually required for the definition of the con-tours for parts with special functions (cams, worms), or for stylistic elements.

q w e

Check Parameters:





Curvature ratio = )R2R1(0,5

R2R1||||

||+

−

e Limit value for infinite curvature radius spinner

Specify a numeric value for an “infinite” curvature radius. A curvature radius that is greater than this value in the check operation will be considered infinite (the curve considered a straight line).


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Replace the involved elements with elements that meet the requirements at their ends; e.g. you can replace neighbouring elements that have constant curvature by a free form curve.

4.8.1.4 Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI]

Geometry—Curves—Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI]

Description:

Elements with a length less then a certain value can lead to degenerate elements and gaps for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision) or during processing (NC). These elements are often the undesired result of rounding off, or of ”closing mechanisms”.

q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum length of the elements. Elements will be considered mini-elements and thus faulty if their length is less than the specified value.

we

See Specific Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria on page 70.


r If „Heal“ is activated, mini-elements are deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Make mini-elements superfluous and delete them by extending the ele-ments that are to be connected to an appropriate length (Extrapolation), or increase their size and shorten the elements appropriately.

4.8.1.5 Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI]

Geometry—Curves—Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI]

Description:

This criterion refers to curves that consist of a number of arcs. The curves are examined for their minimal stretch of the individual arcs, with the aid of a tolerance value.

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum length of segments. Segments will be considered mini-segments and thus faulty if their length is less than the specified value.

we



4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.1.6 Embedded Curves and Points [G-CU-EM]

Geometry—Curves—Embedded Curves and Points [G-CU-EM]

Description:

Identical or almost identical elements can occur during differing geometrical operations or during the copying of external geometries into the model. This can result in the model requiring more space than necessary and the losing of its uniqueness, or validity. Identical elements, also called double elements, often prevent the automatic recognition of con-tinuous curves, or obstruct NC and FEM operations. Elements that lie completely in a larger one are also considered as identical.

q w e r t

y

Check Parameters:

q The permitted maximum distance that elements may have from one another, while still being regarded as identical, is entered here.

w If this button is pressed, then only elements of the same type will be compared to each other, e.g. lines with lines and curves with curves.

e If this button is pressed, then those elements will also be recognized as identical, even if they are completely covered by another. E.g. when a shorter line is lying on a longer one.

rt



4 . C R I T E R I A



y If „Heal“ is activated, identical elements will be deleted.

T I P :

Delete double elements. Take care not to delete the required elements.

4.8.1.7 Wavy Planar Curve [G-CU-WV]

Geometry—Curves—Wavy Planar Curve [G-CU-WV]

Description:

(This criterion has been adopted from the VDA4955 Version 1 for upward compatibility.)

Waviness, which means the amount of changes in the algebraic sign of the curvature of a free form curve, often occurs accidentally, and can often be critical for follow up opera-tions such as creating offset.

q w e r t y

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the number of turning points per segment (arc). If the number of turning points is larger than the entered value, then the segment is considered wavy.

w Specify here the maximum number of turning points per segment chain. If the amount of turning points exceeds the entered value, then the segment is considered wavy.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e Specify here the amount of segments for the segment chain described under w.

r Specify here the marginal value for an infinite curvature radius.

ty



T I P :

Analyse the tangential and center of motion conditions of the curve, correct them, or renew them. Examine the surfaces for Intersection curves, and correct them where applicable.

4.8.1.8 Self-Intersecting Curve [G-CU-IS]

Geometry—Curves—Self-Intersecting Curve [G-CU-IS]

Description:

This criterion checks if wires intersects itself (if there is a real self-intersection or curve sections are situated to closely to each other). The existence of self-intersections is considered as fault.

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Tolerance for intersection point spinner

Specify the minimum distance of close approach: If a twisting wire approaches itself more closely than this value, the approach will be considered a self-intersection.

we See Specific Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria on page 70.

4 . C R I T E R I A



T I P :

Self intersection results from incorrect offset formation (offset distance is larger than the internal radius). Avoid projections (space curve into one level) if possible. Produce subsequently the curve correctly again.

4.8.1.9 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK]

Geometry—Curves—Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK]

Description:

For the definition of NURBS curves knot vectors are necessary. The knot vector defines the number of curve segments and the intersection continuity between single curve segments. The knot vector is defined by real numbers. Single knots could overlap, what is called “multi-knots”. The transmission of curves with narrow neighboring knots into a system with larger tolerances could be problematic, because the internal continuity quality could change.

q w

Check Parameters:

qw

Input of the distance between internal knots

• If the distance between knots is smaller than the value that is entered under point q it will be considered as error free.

• If the distance between knots is larger than the value q and smaller than the value w the knot will be marked as faulty.

• If the distance between knots is larger than the value that is entered under point q it will be considered as error free.

4 . C R I T E R I A



4.8.1.10 High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD]

Geometry—Curves—High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD]

Description:

This criterion checks the polynomial degree of curves. Curves with a too great polynomial degree are considered faulty.

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the numeric value for the maximum allowed polynomial degree.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.1.11 Small Curve Radius of Curvature [G-CU-CR]

Geometry—Curves—Small Curve Radius of Curvature [G-CU-CR]

Description:

The present criterion checks the curvature radius of curves in curve features. If the radius is smaller than the specified value, this will be rated as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Curvature radius spinner box

Specify here the minimum allowed curvature radius.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.1.12 Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG]

Geometry—Curves—Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG]

Description:

This criterion checks if the curves comprise a too large number of segments. The existence of a too large number of segments is considered as fault.

q

Check Parameter:

q Number of segments greater than spinner

Enter the numeric value for the maximum admissible number of segments per curve.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.1.13 Linear Curves with Polynomial Degree greater than 1 [G-CU-ID]

Geometry—Curves—Linear Curves with Polynomial Degree greater than 1 [G-CU-ID]

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model there are linear curve segments with polynomial degree greater than one. If such segments exist an error will be reported.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2 Surfaces

Surfaces are base elements of models that normally are limited by mathematically “simple” boundary curves, and serve as support for the faces that have more complex boundary curves. Surfaces can exceed the contour of the faces. Surfaces can consist of several segments (also called patches).

4.8.2.1 Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG]

Geometry—Surfaces—Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG]

Description:

As surfaces generally exceed the edges of the construction part, and therefore the edge transitions to do not generally exist, only the consistency of the surface segments (patches) are examined and taken note of for surfaces that are naturally bounded.

q w

e r

Check Parameters:

q The maximum distance that two neighbouring segment borders may have with respect to an adjustable number of measurement points is entered here.

we


r The parametrical deviation can be examined with this button.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.2 Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NT]

Geometry—Surfaces—Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NT]

Description:


q w

e

Check Parameters:

qw

The difference between the angles of the normals of two segments along their mutual border, determined in regards to an adjustable number of measurement points, are calculated here. If the resulting angle is greater than the value À and less than the value Á, then the surface is considered faulty.

e This button enables the examination of the tangent deviation in a measurement point (and the projected measurement point of the adjacent patch) with respect to the direction of the isoparametrical curves.


T I P :

Naturally faces with inconsistencies of the patches must be corrected with appropriate border conditions or have to be re-created.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.3 Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NS]

Geometry—Surfaces—Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SU-NS]

Description:

As surfaces generally exceed the edges of the construction part, and therefore the edge transitions to do not generally exist, the consistency of the surface segments (patches) are examined and taken note of for surfaces that are naturally bounded.

q w e

Check Parameters:



Angle (degree) less than spinner


w

Curvature ratio = )R2R1(0,5R2R1

||||||

+−

e Entry of a marginal value for an infinite curvature radius.


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :


4.8.2.4 Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI]

Geometry—Surfaces—Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI]

Description:

Surfaces with length less than a certain value in every parameter direction, can, in the case of a change of systems of tolerance region, become degenerated, faulty elements, or by suppressing /deleting them, can lead to gaps in the topology.

Mini-elements increase the memory requirements, can render the modification process more cumbersome, and may jeopardize the consistency issues. Often they are generated by the system automatically, not intentionally by the user. This also includes automatic gap filling, when data is being imported from external systems.

q w e r

t

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum length of surfaces. Surfaces will be considered mini-elements and thus faulty if their length is less than the specified value.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w The element is also marked if the expansion in one parameter direction is less than the tolerance that is entered under point q.

er See Specific Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria on page 70.



t If „Heal“ is activated, mini-elements will be deleted.

T I P :

Avoid the creation of mini-elements. Eliminate existing mini-elements by enlarging them and by segmentation of the neighbouring elements; after that delete the superfluous elements.

4.8.2.5 Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]

Geometry—Surfaces—Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]

Description:

Surface segments (patches), with length less than a certain value in every parameter direc-tion, can, in the case of a change in system or tolerance region, become degenerated, faulty segments.

q w e r

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Surface segments that are smaller than this specified extension value are regarded as faulty.

w If this option is activated, the extension specified under q will be checked.

e The longitudinal ratio between two segment edges (parameter direction within a surface) should not be less than 1:X (“relative patch size”). These types of ratios signify inferior subdivision and increase the correction effort substantially.

r If this option is activated, the extension ratio specified under e will be checked.


NOTE:

If the options w and r both are deactivated, no check will be executed for the present criterion.

4.8.2.6 Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM]

Geometry—Surfaces—Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM]

Description:

Embedded surfaces (synonym: identical/double elements) unnecessarily increase the amount of required memory, and nullify the uniqueness and validity of the elements. They obstruct the processing of the model, e. g. the automatic creation of topology. Elements that are completely covered by another are also considered identical.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q Distance less than spinner

Enter the numeric value of the maximum separation which may exist between elements for them to still be considered identical.

w Check also planes check box

If this option is activated, it will be also checked if there are identical planes.

e Check also for partial ly identical check box

If this option is activated, additionally to completely congruent elements also will be considered identical elements that are only partially congruent with an other element (when an element has congruent exterior contours, but inside has a whole, when a smaller element is lying completely inside of a greater element, or when an element overlaps an other element).



r If „Heal“ is activated, then all the identical elements will be deleted, except for one (the largest where applicable), as long as they do not have “children” or have refer-ences to other elements.

T I P :

Delete double elements. Take care not to delete the required element.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.7 Small Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]

Geometry—Surfaces—Small Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model there are surfaces with a curvature radius that is smaller than a specified radius. If surfaces are found with a to small curvature radius, this will be rated as fault.

q w

e

Check Parameters:


Specify here the minimum allowed curvature radius. Radii that are smaller than the value defined in the spinner box will be considered faulty.

w Tolerance spinner box

Specify the minimum allowed length of the normal.

e Check only surface region covered by faces check box

If this check box is activated, only a minimal part of the surface will be checked. This partial area is defined by the smallest possible rectangle that encloses all faces lying on the surface.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.8 Big Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]

Geometry—Surfaces—Big Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]

Description:

This criterion checks whether the curvature radius of surfaces is not greater than a specified maximum allowed value. It will be rated as fault if the curvature radius of surfaces is greater than the specified maximum value.

q w

e

Check Parameters:


Specify in this box the maximum allowed curvature radius.


Specify here the tolerance for the minimal length of the normals.




4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.9 Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV]

Geometry—Surfaces—Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV]

Description:

(This criterion has been adopted from VDA4955 Version 1, due to reasons of upward com-patibility of the test programs, but nowadays in practice. It is examined interactively with graphics.)

A random curvature progression of a surface can be critical to styling and follow up opera-tions, e.g. NC processing.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q The maximum number of turning points per patch is entered here. If the number is greater than the given value, the surface is regarded as wavy. For this, the measure-ment points are distributed along the isoparametrical curves within the patch.

w The maximum number of turning points per isoparametrical curve is entered here. If the number of turning points exceeds the given value, the surface is regarded as wavy. For this, the measurement points are distributed along the entire isoparametrical curve.

e Entry of the number of isoparametrical curves which are to be examined for wavi-ness.

r Entry of a marginal value for an infinite curvature radius


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Correct or produce surface with suitable boundary conditions (degrees, edge curves or bases) again.

4.8.2.10 Folded Surface [G-SU-FO]

Geometry—Surfaces—Folded Surface [G-SU-FO]

Description:

Normally the normals of a surface at all points belonging to that surface consistently point either in or out. Deviations from this behaviour, called reversed normals, can occur at the edges of surfaces. In this case the work piece can be damaged, as the tool can penetrate the surface.

The special case of reversed normals at the surface edges often can be found at the corner of “quasi-triangle patches”. This especially occurs when two border curves slightly go beyond their intersection point.

This criterion checks whether the deviation between the normal angles is greater than a predefined value (mostly 90°). It will be considered as a fault if this value is exceeded.

q w

e r t y

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q Angle between neighbouring normals greater than spinner box

Enter here the maximum angle between the adjacent normals.

w Number of point to check spinner box

ATTENTION:

Too large a number of points can result in existing errors not being found, because in this case the points lie too close to each other and the angle difference between their normals can be only minimal. (For general information on this spinner box see chapter Specif ic Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria on page 70.)

e Number of adjacent points to check spinner box

Specify here the number of path and name of the CATProducts which are to be checked.

Checking with a small number of points will allow to detect reversed normals that occur in small areas, checking with a great number of points will find out also changes of normals in larger areas. The recommended point number is “1” as normally this check is executed to detect reversed normals in small areas.

r Check neighbor segments check box

If this option is activated, additionally there will be evaluated the normals of two adjacent patches along the boundaries.

t Check only boundary check box

If this option is activated, exclusively the normals of the boundary curves will be checked.

y Check only surface region covered by faces check box



T I P :

Surfaces with a reversed normal (the same as: folded surfaces) should be created anew. When doing so, pay a special attention to the transitions—they must be tangent-continuous. If the reversed normal is situated in the apex of a triangle patch, the apex can be cut off (within the limits of the tolerances for gaps and mini-elements), so that the new (fourth) boundary of the patch will have a tolerated length. Alternatively, a three-sided surface with correct normals can be defined.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.11 Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC]

Geometry—Surfaces—Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC]

Description:

A surface segment (patch) with one segment border falling short of a tolerance (“quasi-triangle patch“), can, in the case of a change in system or tolerance region, lead to undefined normals.

A surface normal is geometrically undefined when the tangents of the isoparametricals do not lie on the tangential plane or do not lie within the tolerance specified in the check criterion (angle between the tangential plane and the tangent of the isoparametrical). The tangential plane is constituted by the tangents of the adjacent boundaries (see fig.).

Tangents of the boundaries

Tangential plane

Tangents of the isoparametric curve�

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t

y u

Check Parameters:

q Length of a Boundary Greater than . . . spinner

Specify here the minimal value for the length that one of the boundary curves of a surface can have so that the surface will be considered as a quasi-triangle patch.

If one of the boundary curves is shorter than the value specified here, the surface will be considered not as a quasi-triangle patch, but as a regular triangle (i. e. not con-sidered faulty).

w Length of a boundary less than … spinner

Specify here the max ima l value for the length that one of the boundary curves of a surface can have that the surface will be considered as a quasi-triangle patch. If all boundary curves are longer than the value specified here, then the surface will be considered not as a quasi-triangle patch, but as a normal surface (i. e. not considered faulty).

er


t Mark Only … check box

When this option is activated, then elements will be considered faulty only if the surface normal geometrically is not defined.

y Number of Isoparameter Curves check box

Enter the number of isoparametrical curves to be used temporarily for checking.

4 . C R I T E R I A


u Tolerance Angle spinner box

Enter the allowed angle deviation between the tangent directions of the isoparametrical curves and the tangential plane.


T I P :

Manually set the segment border values larger than the mini-element tolerance, or define it with a surface bounded by three sides.

4.8.2.12 Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP]

Geometry—Surfaces—Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP]

Description:

Undefined normals in the corner points are considered whenever the angle between adja-cent border curves of a surface is less than a certain minimum angle, or exceeds a certain maximum angle.

q

w

e

r

t

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

qw

For segments with 4 boundary curves, specify under q the minimal allowed and under w the maximal allowed angle alpha.

If there will be found an angle between two adjacent boundary curves that is less then q or greater then w, the surface will be considered faulty.

er

For segments with 3 boundary curves, specify under e the minimal allowed and under r the maximal allowed angle alpha.

If there will be found an angle between two adjacent boundary curves that is l e ss then e o r g re a t e r then r, the surface will be considered faulty.

t Specify the minimal curve length. If the length of one of the boundary curves is less than the value specified here, then the parameters for segments with 3 boundary curves will be used.


4.8.2.13 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface [G-SU-IK]

Geometry—Surfaces—Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface [G-SU-IK]

Description:

This criterion checks whether the distance between the knots is within a tolerance range. Smaller or greater distances are considered as a fault.

q w

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

qw






4.8.2.14 High-Degree Surface [G-SU-HD]

Geometry—Surfaces—High-Degree Surface [G-SU-HD]

Description:

The degree of polynomial display for every patch determines the degree of freedom for a surface. A polynomial degree that is too high may lead to oscillations, or in the case of a decrease in degree by approximating, to a decrease in the quality of the data in regards to form, required memory and consistencies.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum admissible polynomial degree.

w If this option is activated, canonical surfaces will be not checked.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.15 Non-Uniform Polynomial Degree of Patches in Surface [G-SU-xx]

Geometry—Surfaces—Non-Uniform Polynomial Degree of Patches in Surface [G-SU-xx]

Description:

This criterion checks whether all segments of a surface have an identical polynomial degree. The check can be executed separately for the u- and the v-direction or together for both directions. The existence of segments with different polynomial degree is considered as fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q When this option is activated, the segments polynomial degrees must be identical for bo t h u- and v-directions. When this option is deactivated, a uniform polynomial degree is required only inside the individual u-direction and the individual v-direction (between the directions the polynomial degree can differ).


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.16 Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG]

Geometry—Surfaces—Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG]

Description:

The inappropriate number of patches within a surface generally means that the surface is too large or complex. This can occur by an inferior approximation of a surface of high grade into one of a low grade, or by summarizing areas with entirely different curvatures in a surface.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, there will be executed a check on the number of segment rows in each of the parameter directions (u and v).

w Enter here the maximum admissible number of segments rows. If a surface will be found with a greater number of segment rows, the surface will be considered faulty.

e If this option is activated, the surfaces will checked on their total number of segments.

r Enter here the maximum admissible total number of segments per surface. If there will be found a surface with a greater number of segment, the surface will be considered faulty.


T I P :

Divide surfaces with large curvature differences. A surface with harmonious curvature distribution and a large number of (small) segments can be replaced with a surface with a possibly higher grade.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.17 Unused Surface Segment Rows [G-SU-UN]

Geometry—Surfaces—Unused Surface Segment Rows [G-SU-UN]

Description:

The area allocated with a face can be so small, that almost entire patch series are not occupied. These unoccupied patch series may cost memory and can generally be removed without any problems.

The surfaces that do not serve as a definition of faces are also found through this criterion, and are therefore considered superfluous.

Sometimes the unoccupied surface areas are needed for later processing. Their recon-struction is tedious and can only be achieved using approximation. Due to this reason there is no general recommendation to remove unoccupied patch series.

q w

Check Parameters:

q If this button is activated, the surfaces, which do not have any edges, will be high-lighted.

w If this button is activated, the surfaces that have entire patch series, but do not have bounded surfaces, are marked.


T I P :

If desired, divide the surface along the suitable patch border and delete the unnecessary patch. If the surface is unoccupied, then delete it completely.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.18 Undefined Surface Normal [G-SU-xx 1]

Geometry—Surfaces—Undefined Surface Normal [G-SU-xx0F ]

Description:

A surface segment (patch) with an undefined normal, suggests that the cross product of the tangents in the points that are to be evaluated equals zero, or tends towards zero. This can lead to problems when offsetting, as the direction of the offset cannot be defined.


1 “xx“ is used for criteria that are not yet defined by SASIG.

Tangent direction of the isoparametrical curves

Tangent direction of the boundary curves Tangent plane

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t

Check Parameters:

q If the cross product of the tangents within a measurement point is less of the given value, then the surface normal is considered not defined.

w If this button is activated and a triangle patch is found during the examination, then normals that are not geometrically determined are marked.

e It is only then a triangle patch if there are actually three border curves, or if one of the border curves falls short of the given value.

r Number of the isoparametrical curves that are to be used for the examination.

t Valid angle deviation between the tangent direction of the isoparametrical curve and the tangential plane.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.19 High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface [G-SU-xx 2]

Geometry—Surfaces—High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface [G-SU-xx1F ]

Description:

This criterion checks whether a definite number of control points for NURBS is not exceeded. The check is executed for bo t h the t o t a l number of control points and the maximal number of control points in one of the u a n d v d i r ec t ions . Surfaces are con-sidered faulty if one of the numbers of control points is exceeded.

The check is executed for all surface segments that contain control points.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum allowed number of control points fo r w ho l e t he su r -f ac e (product of the number of control points in u and v directions).

w Specify here the maximum allowed number of control points that may be situated in o n e o f t h e u o r v d i r ec t ions .



4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.20 Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 [G-SU-ID]

Geometry – Surfaces – Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 [G-SU-ID]

Description:

This criterion is conceived to exclude the existence of planar surfaces with polynomial degree greater than 1. The criterion checks surfaces with polynomial degree greater than 1 whether they contain segments for which the distance of the measurement points to the mean plane is within the tolerance range (thus being considered plane). These surfaces are considered faulty.

q

Check Parameters:

q Define here the tolerance for the distance that may be between the measurement points and the mean plan for which the segments are considered to be plane.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.2.21 Multi-Face Surface [G-SU-MU]

Geometry—Surfaces—Multi-Face Surface [G-SU-MU]

Description:

This criterion checks whether on a surface are situated several faces. If on one and the same surface several faces are found, this will be rated as fault.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.3 Face Edges

Bounded surfaces, also simply called “faces“ describe the geometrical surface of an object, where applicable, including holes, cuts, etc. on the said surface with the projected, (arbitrarily complex) border curves. The boundary curve should be understood as a closed curve.

This association between surfaces and faces leads to the fact that many of the quality criteria generally apply to both.

4.8.3.1 Large Face Edge Segment Gap [G-ED-LG]

Geometry—Face Edges—Large Face Edge Segment Gap [G-ED-LG]

Description:

Gaps and overlays of segments of boundaries can lead to problems related to their consis-tency; difficulties can arise in the definition of the face, while sharp bends and curvature jumps can be constructively intended.

q

Check Parameters:

q Border curves are evaluated as faulty if partial segments have gaps that exceed the given distance.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.3.2 Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI]

Geometry—Face Edges—Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI]

Description:

The border curve of a face consists of numerous curves. Border curves with a length less then a certain value can lead to degenerate elements and gaps for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision) or during processing (NC). These elements are often the undesired result of rounding off, or of ”closing mechanisms”.

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Border curves (edge) are defined as faulty if they are shorter than the given value.

we



T I P :

For a new limited surface summarize the edge curve with adjacent edge curves, or delete/increase the mini edge curve and correct the following elements accordingly.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.3.3 Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI]

Geometry—Face Edges—Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI]

Description:

The individual border curves (edges consist of numerous partial segments. Partial seg-ments can occur, when composite curves are created, or they exist as arcs in polynomial curves.

Partial segments with a length less then a certain value can lead to degenerate elements and gaps for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision) or during processing (NC). These elements are often the undesired result of rounding off, or of ”closing mechanisms”.

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Partial segments are evaluated as faulty if they are short of the given value.

we



T I P :

For a new face delete/enlarge the mini segments and correct the following elements accordingly.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.3.4 Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG]

Geometry—Face Edges—Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG]

Description:

An unnecessary large amount of segments within a boundary increases the danger of mini-elements, as well as inconsistencies and complicates alterations.

q

Check Parameters:

q The criterion is evaluated as faulty if the amount of segments within the boundary exceeds the given value.


T I P :

Correct or replace the boundaries and generate the face with them again.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.3.5 Closed Face Edge [G-ED-CL]

Geometry—Face Edges—Closed Face Edge [G-ED-CL]

Description:

The present criterion checks whether a face has one or several c l o se d edges. Faces having closed edges are considered faulty.

Normally CATIA and also some other CAD systems do not allow generating and processing faces with closed edges (e. g. circles or ellipses). They can however come into CATIA by import from other CAD systems. Checking imported models with this criterion allows to find out such faulty faces, problems for further work can be avoided.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Geometrical check check box

If this check box is d e ac t i va t e d , only a topological check will be executed (i. e. a check as to whether faces exist having one only edge curve). If such a face is found, this will be rated as fault.

If this check box is ac t i va t e d , additionally it will be checked whether the edge curves are closed, i. e. whether the starting point of the edge curve coincides with its end point. This check is executed for all edge curves of the faces. In this case a fault will be reported when closed edges are found.


For the geometric check, activated with the check box q, with this spinner must be specified the maximum allowed distance between the start point and the end point of the edge curve for which the curve is considered closed.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.4 Face Loops

4.8.4.1 Large Face Edge Gap [G-LO-LG]

Geometry—Face Loops—Large Face Edge Gap [G-LO-LG]

Description:

Gaps and overlays of segments of boundaries can lead to problems in their inconsistencies; difficulties can arise in the definition of the face, while sharp bends and curvature jumps can be constructively intended.

q

Check Parameters:

q Border curves are evaluated as faulty if there are gaps that exceed the specified distance.


T I P :

Limit again the boundary ends within the tolerance for identical points. The preference is to adapt the curve ends, not to insert mini segments.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.4.2 Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA]

Geometry—Face Loops—Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA]

Description:

The present criterion checks if the angle between two boundary curves is not smaller than the specified minimum value. If the angle is smaller than this minimum value, the criterion is considered not fulfilled.

q

Check Parameter:

q Angle less than spinner

Specify here the minimum admissible value for the angle (in degrees).


NOTE:

This criterion is not to be used if in the construction there are acute angles that are deliberately used by the designer.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.4.3 Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Geometry—Face Loops—Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Description:

This criterion comprises self-intersection and self-contact of boundary curves, but also reciprocal intersection and contact of (exterior/interior) boundary curves.

Self-intersection or reciprocal intersection and contact of boundary curves as a result of a too less distance can, when the tolerance zone is changed, cause the invalidity of faces (loss of the face definition) as well as the loss of the closeness of topologies.

This criterion checks on the observance of a specified minimal distance between different composite curves or the segments of one and the same composite curve. If the specified distance is not observed, this will be rated as fault.

q w e r

Check Parameters:



we


r If this option is activated, only real intersection points will be marked, but not points of contact (distances below the tolerance). If this option is deactivated, points of contact and intersection points will be marked.


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Increase the distance between the boundaries, remove the loops, perhaps divide the boundaries or summarize the surfaces.

4.8.4.4 Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT]

Geometry—Face Loops—Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT]

Description:

The curves of a face’s boundary loops should have a uniform orientation. This criterion checks whether in boundary loops are curves with different orientation. The existence of such an inconsistent orientation of boundary curves is considered as fault; boundary curves whose orientation differs from the orientation of the majority of the boundary curves will be marked faulty.

Check Parameters:


T I P :

If necessary, turn partially around the direction of rotation and produce the face again.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.5 Faces

4.8.5.1 Tiny Face [G-FA-TI]

Geometry—Faces—Tiny Face [G-FA-TI]

Description:

Elements with the length less than a certain value can lead to degenerated elements and gaps, for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the transfer of data (into a system with lower precision), or during processing (NC).

q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum extension of faces. Faces will be considered mini-elements and thus faulty if their extension is less than the specified value.

we




r If „Heal“ is activated, mini-faces are deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Delete or increase the small faces and adapt the neighbouring elements accordingly.

4.8.5.2 Narrow Face [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Geometry—Faces—Narrow Face [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Description:

Elements with length less than a certain value can lead to degenerated elements and gaps, for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision), or during processing (NC).

q w e r

t

Check Parameters:

q Faces are evaluated as faulty if they are narrow – their expansion falls shorter than the given value.

we


r If this button is activated, faces are evaluated as faulty if only a part of the face is narrow.


4 . C R I T E R I A



t If the Healing option is activated, only those narrow elements will be deleted that are completely narrow (not only on one or several places).

T I P :

Delete or enlarge the narrow elements and adapt the neighbouring elements accordingly.

4.8.5.3 Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM]

Geometry—Faces—Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM]

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model there are identical faces, i. e. faces that are an identical (congruent) copy of an other face. If the Check also for partial ly identical option is activated, it will be also checked whether there exist identical faces, lying inside an other face. The existence of identical faces is considered as fault.

q w

e r

t

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum distance between two elements, where they are still regarded as identical.

w If this option is activated, in addition to the elements that are completely congruent, also elements will be considered as identical that lie inside of an other face.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e If this option is activated, the check will be executed only for faces inside o ne topology. If the option is deactivated, a l l faces of a l l topologies will be compared.

r If this option is activated, the check will be executed only for faces inside o ne set. (If the option is deactivated, a l l faces of a l l sets will be compared.)



t If „Heal“ is activated, the corresponding elements will be deleted.

T I P :

Delete the double elements. Watch that the required element remains.

4.8.5.4 Large Face Edge to Surface Gap [G-FA-EG]

Geometry—Faces—Large Face Edge to Surface Gap [G-FA-EG]

Description:

Boundaries that have too great a distance to the surface (normal or sideways) prevent the proper definition of the face. In systems or environments with greater precision they require a new projection onto the surface.

q

w

e r

Check Parameters:

q If a 3D-boundary curve exists, the projection distance is checked.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w The maximum distance between the boundary and the surface, where they are still correct, is entered here.

er



T I P :

Form the boundaries always in the tolerance-area of identical elements as intersection-curves or projections; perhaps generate it again accordingly.

4.8.5.5 Closed Face [G-FA-CL]

Geometry—Faces—Closed Face [G-FA-CL]

Description:

The present criterion checks whether in a model closed faces exist (i. e. faces in which two of the edges coincide with each other). The existence of closed faces will be considered as fault.

Normally CATIA and also some other CAD systems do not allow generating and processing faces with closed faces. Faces with closed faces can however come into CATIA by import from other CAD systems. Checking imported models with this criterion allows to find out such faulty faces, problems for further work can be avoided.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Check geometrical check box

If this option is d e a c t i v a t e d , only a topological check will be executed—whether there is a topological boundary curve of a face that adjoins two edges of these face (see fig. for example). If such a case is found, this will be rated as fault.

Example: Closed face

4 . C R I T E R I A


If this option is ac t i va ted , it will be checked whether two of the edges coincide. This check is executed for all edge curves of the faces.


For the geometric check, activated with the check box q, with this spinner must be specified the maximum allowed distance between the edge curves for which they are considered coinciding.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.6 Shells/Volumes

Correlated adjacent faces that constitute together a certain part of the surface or even the whole surface of an object are called topology or skin.

4.8.6.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx 3]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx2F ]

Description:

This criterion calculates program-internal topologies in case that no topology does exist yet in the model. These topologies then are used for the model assessment by other topology criteria.

q w e r t y u

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the standard tolerance for topologies, i. e. the maximal distance that may be between adjacent faces for which the surfaces are considered belonging to the same topology.

we


r If this option is activated, topologies can be generated over several sets.


4 . C R I T E R I A


t If this option is activated, for the calculation of the topology also faces will be used, which are not selected by MULTISELECT in the element selection.

y If this option is activated, only faces/surfaces for the calculation are used, which are situated in the SHOW and PICK.

u This option allows specifying additionally to the standard tolerance q a second tolerance for topologies. All transitions between faces where the distance between the faces is greater than the distance q and less than or equal to the distance u additionally will be considered topologically closed.

This option creates the precondition that enables the analysis of the transitions by the criteria 4.8.6.3 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG], 4.8.6.4 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT] and 4.8.6.5 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS].

An alternative to this criterion to check the closeness of topologies is the criterion 4.8.6.2 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR] (see page 293).

NOTE: The use of this option makes sense only if the tolerance value specified here is greater than the tolerance q.


4.8.6.2 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume [G-SH-FR]

Description:

This criterion checks the boundary contours of a topology for their closeness. Closed contours are rated as error free, open contours and multiple knots are rated as errors.

The check is executed only for sk in s and vo l ume s . F a c e s n o t i n t e g r a t e d i n a t o p o l o g y will be checked only if before the criterion 4.8.6.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx2F] (page 292) was executed.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t y

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, a l l contours of the topology are displayed even if they are not incorrect.

w If this option is activated, a check will be executed for gaps within the topology. Gaps that are smaller than the tolerance value, set in the spinner box e will be rated as a fault.

e Set the tolerance value for the gaps.

r If this option is activated, closed identical boundaries will not be rated as error if they are tangent continuous.

t Set the tolerance value for tangent discontinuity.

y If this option is activated, gaps within the topology that are only partially smaller than the tolerance will be rated as error.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.6.3 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG]

Description:

Per definition, the faces and their compounds describe the surfaces of parts and resources. Special meaning is given to the consistency of the limited surfaces amongst themselves.

Point consistency, which means the transition of limited surfaces within a given topology, is the most important quality feature within the surface compound. An inconsistency that does not meet the tolerance requirements can lead to the loss of the topology, in the case of a change in system or Model Dimension, or kick off an automatic correction (healing) in some systems. This can result in unintended changes, or the appearance of new mini-elements.

This criterion checks only skins and volumes, free faces only are considered if the criterion „Calculation of topologies“ is executed before.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q The maximum distance that two neighboring segment borders may have in regards to an adjustable amount of measurement points, is entered here.

we


4 . C R I T E R I A


r It can be chosen here if

• the continuity should be checked at the corresponding limit points. This option makes only sense if the tolerance for the calculation of the topology is smaller or equal to the value that is adjusted under point .

• the continuity should be checked in the projectable limit points.

• the limit points should be ignored for the check.


T I P :

In case of gaps in surface transitions, the faces should be created anew, with a mutual boundary. Special attention is to be given to the continuity conditions.

4.8.6.4 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT]

Description:

Normals consistency may have an effect on the milling ability or on the surface quality.


q w e

r t

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

qw

The difference between the angles of the normals of two segments along their mutual border, determined in regards to an adjustable amount of measurement points, are calculated here. If the resulting angle is greater than the value À and less than the value Á, then the topology is considered faulty.

er


t It can be chosen here if

• the continuity should be checked at the corresponding limit points. This option makes only sense if the tolerance for the calculation of the topology is smaller or equal to the value that is adjusted under point q;

• the continuity should be checked in the projectable limit points;



4.8.6.5 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS]

Description:

Curvature discontinuities may have an effect on the milling ability or on the surface quality.

This criterion checks only skins and volumes; free faces only are considered if the „Calculation of topologies“ criterion 4.8.6.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx2F] is executed before (see page 292).

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t y

Check Parameters:






R2R1||||

||+

−


rt


y It can be chosen here if

• the continuity should be checked at the corresponding limit points. This option makes only sense if the tolerance for the calculation of the topology is smaller or equal to the value that is adjusted under point q.




4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :


4.8.6.6 Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA]

Description:

If the angle at the common edge between two neighboring faces is too small, then sharp edges or incisions can be a result. These areas can not be produced. The checks also will find out overlappings.

This criterion checks only skins and volumes, free faces are considered only if the criterion 4.8.6.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx2F] is executed before (on page 292).

q w

e r

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum admissible value for the angle between two surface normals adjacent to each other. If there will be found an angle that is greater than the value specified here, the transition will be considered faulty.

we


4 . C R I T E R I A







T I P :

Examine the construction.

4.8.6.7 Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell/Volume

[G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes— Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell/Volume [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]

Description:

The uniform alignment of the surface normals within a topology is required for determin-ing the processing direction for milling, for the display of shading, as well as for the determining of the drafting ability, or for the definition of the direction of touching for measurements.


q w

e r

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, skins and volumes are not checked that are used by solids.

w If this option is activated the normal orientation will be not inverted in case that logi-cally linked (parent) elements must be modified.



e If this heal option is activated, the orientation of normals marked with plus sign will be inverted.

r If this heal option is activated, the orientation of normals marked with minus sign will be inverted.

4.8.6.8 Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM]

Description:

It is important for the topological uniqueness of a surface that each interior surface must have only o ne definite neighboring surface, what means that it may have one neighboring border at the most and would therefore be free of ramifications.

However, it is permitted that a surface border borders numerous neighboring surface borders one after another (T-shaped connector).


Check Parameters:


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Delete superfluous elements.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.6.9 Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS]

Description:

The present criterion checks the topology on points where self-intersection takes place. The existence of self-intersection is considered as fault. (For the further development it is planned to check topologies also on too close self-contact.)

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the minimal distance that a detected intersection point (point of self-intersection of a face) may have to the boundary. If the intersection point is situated too close to the boundary, this will be not rated as self-intersection.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.6.9.1 Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]

Geometry—Shells/Volumes—Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS]— Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]

Description:

The present criterion checks how many edges use a vertex. If the number of edges that come together in a vertex is greater than the specified number, this will be rated as a fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum admissible number of edges.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7 Solid/SKD

To transfer solids over neutral interfaces (e. g. STEP), a so-called B-REP (boundary representation) is exported. A B-REP is the description of a solid by the faces that form the surface of the solid. As these faces are constituted by surfaces and boundary curves, for solids the same demands on quality apply as for closed topologies (i. e. volumes).

4.8.7.1 Surfaces

Surfaces are base elements of models that normally are limited by mathematically “simple” boundary curves, and serve as support for the faces that have more complex boundary curves. Surfaces can exceed the contour of the faces. Surfaces can consist of several segments (also called patches).

4.8.7.1.1 Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in

Solid/SKD [G-SU-LG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SU-LG]

Description:


q w e r

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

q The maximum distance that two neighbouring segment borders may have with respect to an adjustable number of measurement points is entered here.

we


r The parametrical deviation can be examined with this button.


4.8.7.1.2 Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1-Discontinuity)

in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NT]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1-Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NT]

Description:


q w e r t

Check Parameters:

qw

The difference between the angles of the normals of two segments along their mutual border, determined in regards to an adjustable number of measurement points, are calculated here. If the resulting angle is greater than the value À and less than the value Á, then the surface is considered faulty.

4 . C R I T E R I A


e This button enables the examination of the tangent deviation in a measurement point (and the projected measurement point of the adjacent patch) with respect to the direction of the isoparametrical curves.


T I P :


4.8.7.1.3 Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2-Discontinuity)

in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NS]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2-Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NS]

Description:

As surfaces generally exceed the edges of the construction part, and therefore the edge transitions to do not generally exist, the consistency of the surface segments (patches) are examined and taken note of for surfaces that are naturally bounded.

q w e

Check Parameters:



4 . C R I T E R I A


Angle (degree) less than spinner


w

Curvature ratio = )R2R1(0,5R2R1

||||||

+−



T I P :


4.8.7.1.4 Tiny Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-TI]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Tiny Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-TI]

Description:

Surfaces with length less than a certain value in every parameter direction, can, in the case of a change of systems of tolerance region, become degenerated, faulty elements, or by suppressing /deleting them, can lead to gaps in the topology.

Mini-elements increase the memory requirements, can render the modification process more cumbersome, and may jeopardize the consistency issues. Often they are generated by the system automatically, not intentionally by the user. This also includes automatic gap filling, when data is being imported from external systems.

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum length of surfaces. Surfaces will be considered mini-elements and thus faulty if their length is less than the specified value.

w The element is also marked if the expansion in one parameter direction is less than the tolerance that is entered under point q.

er See Specific Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria on page 70.


T I P :

Avoid the creation of mini-elements. Eliminate existing mini-elements by enlarging them and by segmentation of the neighbouring elements; after that delete the superfluous elements.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.5 Narrow Surface Segment in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NA,

G-SU-RN]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Narrow Surface Segment in Solid/SKD [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]

Description:

Surface segments (patches), with length less than a certain value in every parameter direc-tion, can, in the case of a change in system or tolerance region, become degenerated, faulty segments.

q w e r t y

Check Parameters:

q Surface segments that are smaller than this specified extension value are regarded as faulty.

w If this option is activated, the extension specified under q will be checked.

e The longitudinal ratio between two segment edges (parameter direction within a surface) should not be less than 1:X (“relative patch size”). These types of ratios signify inferior subdivision and increase the correction effort substantially.

r If this option is activated, the extension ratio specified under e will be checked.


NOTE:

If the options w and r both are deactivated, no check will be executed for the present criterion.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.6 Embedded Surfaces in Solid/SKD [G-SU-EM]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Embedded Surfaces in Solid/SKD [G-SU-EM]

Description:

Embedded surfaces (synonym: identical/double elements) unnecessarily increase the amount of required memory, and nullify the uniqueness and validity of the elements. They obstruct the processing of the model, e. g. the automatic creation of topology. Elements that are completely covered by another are also considered identical.

q w

Check Parameters:



w Check also for partial ly identical check box



4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.7 Small Surface Radius of Curvature in Solid/SKD

[G-SU-CR]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Small Surface Radius of Curvature in Solid/SKD [G-SU-CR]

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model there are surfaces with a curvature radius that is smaller than a specified radius. If surfaces are found with a to small curvature radius, this will be rated as fault.

q w

Check Parameters:


Specify here the minimum allowed curvature radius. Radii that are smaller than the value defined in the spinner box will be considered faulty.


Specify the minimum allowed length of the normal.




4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.8 Wavy Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-WV]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Wavy Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-WV]

Description:

(This criterion has been adopted from VDA4955 Version 1, due to reasons of upward com-patibility of the test programs, but nowadays in practice. It is examined interactively with graphics.)

A random curvature progression of a surface can be critical to styling and follow up opera-tions, e.g. NC processing.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q The maximum number of turning points per patch is entered here. If the number is greater than the given value, the surface is regarded as wavy. For this, the measure-ment points are distributed along the isoparametrical curves within the patch.

w The maximum number of turning points per isoparametrical curve is entered here. If the number of turning points exceeds the given value, the surface is regarded as wavy. For this, the measurement points are distributed along the entire isoparametrical curve.

e Entry of the number of isoparametrical curves which are to be examined for wavi-ness.

r Entry of a marginal value for an infinite curvature radius


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Correct or produce surface with suitable boundary conditions (degrees, edge curves or bases) again.

4.8.7.1.9 Folded Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-FO]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Folded Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-FO]

Description:

Normally the normals of a surface at all points belonging to that surface consistently point either in or out. Deviations from this behaviour, called reversed normals, can occur at the edges of surfaces. In this case the work piece can be damaged, as the tool can penetrate the surface.

The special case of reversed normals at the surface edges often can be found at the corner of “quasi-triangle patches”. This especially occurs when two border curves slightly go beyond their intersection point.

This criterion checks whether the deviation between the normal angles is greater than a predefined value (mostly 90°). It will be considered as a fault if this value is exceeded.

q

w e r t

Check Parameters:

q Angle between neighbouring normals greater than spinner box

Enter here the maximum angle between the adjacent normals.

4 . C R I T E R I A


w Number of point to check spinner box

ATTENTION: Too large a number of points can result in existing errors not being found, because in this case the points lie too close to each other and the angle difference between their normals can be only minimal. (For general information on this spinner box see chapter Specif ic Standard Elements for Geometric Criteria on page 70.)

e Number of adjacent points to check spinner box

Specify here the number of path and name of the CATProducts which are to be checked.

Checking with a small number of points will allow to detect reversed normals that occur in small areas, checking with a great number of points will find out also changes of normals in larger areas. The recommended point number is “1” as normally this check is executed to detect reversed normals in small areas.

r Check neighbor segments check box

If this option is activated, additionally there will be evaluated the normals of two adjacent patches along the boundaries.

t Check only boundary check box

If this option is activated, exclusively the normals of the boundary curves will be checked.

y Check only surface region covered by faces check box



T I P :

Surfaces with a reversed normal (the same as: folded surfaces) should be created anew. When doing so, pay a special attention to the transitions—they must be tangent-continuous. If the reversed normal is situated in the apex of a triangle patch, the apex can be cut off (within the limits of the tolerances for gaps and mini-elements), so that the new (fourth) boundary of the patch will have a tolerated length. Alternatively, a three-sided surface with correct normals can be defined.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.10 Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary in Solid/SKD

[G-SU-DC]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary in Solid/SKD [G-SU-DC]

Description:

A surface segment (patch) with one segment border falling short of a tolerance (“quasi-triangle patch“), can, in the case of a change in system or tolerance region, lead to undefined normals.


Tangents of the boundaries

Tangential plane

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t

y u

Check Parameters:

q Length of a Boundary Greater than . . . spinner

Specify here the minimal value for the length that one of the boundary curves of a surface can have so that the surface will be considered as a quasi-triangle patch.

If one of the boundary curves is shorter than the value specified here, the surface will be considered not as a quasi-triangle patch, but as a regular triangle (i. e. not con-sidered faulty).

w Length of a boundary less than … spinner

Specify here the max ima l value for the length that one of the boundary curves of a surface can have that the surface will be considered as a quasi-triangle patch. If all boundary curves are longer than the value specified here, then the surface will be considered not as a quasi-triangle patch, but as a normal surface (i. e. not considered faulty).

er


t Mark Only … check box

When this option is activated, then elements will be considered faulty only if the surface normal geometrically is not defined.

y Number of Isoparameter Curves check box

Enter the number of isoparametrical curves to be used temporarily for checking.

4 . C R I T E R I A


u Tolerance Angle spinner box

Enter the allowed angle deviation between the tangent directions of the isoparametrical curves and the tangential plane.


T I P :

Manually set the segment border values larger than the mini-element tolerance, or define it with a surface bounded by three sides.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.11 Degenerate Surface Segment Corner in Solid/SKD

[G-SU-DP]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Degenerate Surface Segment Corner in Solid/SKD [G-SU-DP]

Description:

Undefined normals in the corner points are considered whenever the angle between adja-cent border curves of a surface is less than a certain minimum angle, or exceeds a certain maximum angle.

q

w

e

r

t

Check Parameters:

qw

For segments with 4 boundary curves, specify under q the minimal allowed and under w the maximal allowed angle alpha.

If there will be found an angle between two adjacent boundary curves that is less then q or greater then w, the surface will be considered faulty.

4 . C R I T E R I A


er

For segments with 3 boundary curves, specify under e the minimal allowed and under r the maximal allowed angle alpha.

If there will be found an angle between two adjacent boundary curves that is l e ss then e o r g re a t e r then r, the surface will be considered faulty.

t Specify the minimal curve length. If the length of one of the boundary curves is less than the value specified here, then the parameters for segments with 3 boundary curves will be used.


4.8.7.1.12 Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface in Solid/SKD

[G-SU-IK]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-IK]

Description:

This criterion checks whether the distance between the knots is within a tolerance range. Smaller or greater distances are considered as a fault.

q w

Check Parameters:

qw





4 . C R I T E R I A



4.8.7.1.13 High-Degree Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-HD]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—High-Degree Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-HD]

Description:

The degree of polynomial display for every patch determines the degree of freedom for a surface. A polynomial degree that is too high may lead to oscillations, or in the case of a decrease in degree by approximating, to a decrease in the quality of the data in regards to form, required memory and consistencies.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum admissible polynomial degree.

w If this option is activated, canonical surfaces will be not checked.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.14 Fragmented Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-FG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces—Fragmented Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-FG]

Description:

The inappropriate number of patches within a surface generally means that the surface is too large or complex. This can occur by an inferior approximation of a surface of high grade into one of a low grade, or by summarizing areas with entirely different curvatures in a surface.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, there will be executed a check on the number of segment rows in each of the parameter directions (u and v).

w Enter here the maximum admissible number of segments rows. If a surface will be found with a greater number of segment rows, the surface will be considered faulty.

e If this option is activated, the surfaces will checked on their total number of segments.

r Enter here the maximum admissible total number of segments per surface. If there will be found a surface with a greater number of segment, the surface will be considered faulty.


T I P :

Divide surfaces with large curvature differences. A surface with harmonious curvature distribution and a large number of (small) segments can be replaced with a surface with a possibly higher grade.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.15 Unused Surface Segment Rows in Solid/SKD

[G-SU-UN]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Unused Surface Segment Rows in Solid/SKD [G-SU-UN]

Description:

The area allocated with a face can be so small, that almost entire patch series are not occupied. These unoccupied patch series may cost memory and can generally be removed without any problems.

The surfaces that do not serve as a definition of faces are also found through this criterion, and are therefore considered superfluous.

Sometimes the unoccupied surface areas are needed for later processing. Their recon-struction is tedious and can only be achieved using approximation. Due to this reason there is no general recommendation to remove unoccupied patch series.

Check Parameters:


T I P :

If desired, divide the surface along the suitable patch border and delete the unnecessary patch. If the surface is unoccupied, then delete it completely.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.16 Undefined Surface Normal in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx 4]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— Undefined Surface Normal in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx3F ]

Description:

A surface segment (patch) with an undefined normal, suggests that the cross product of the tangents in the points that are to be evaluated equals zero, or tends towards zero. This can lead to problems when offsetting, as the direction of the offset cannot be defined.



Tangent direction of the boundary curves Tangent plane

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e r t

Check Parameters:

q If the cross product of the tangents within a measurement point is less of the given value, then the surface normal is considered not defined.

w If this button is activated and a triangle patch is found during the examination, then normals that are not geometrically determined are marked.

e It is only then a triangle patch if there are actually three border curves, or if one of the border curves falls short of the given value.

r Number of the isoparametrical curves that are to be used for the examination.

t Valid angle deviation between the tangent direction of the isoparametrical curve and the tangential plane.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.17 High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface

in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx 5]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Surfaces— High Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx4F ]

Description:

This criterion checks whether a definite number of control points for NURBS is not exceeded. The check is executed for bo t h the t o t a l number of control points and the maximal number of control points in one of the u a n d v d i r ec t ions . Surfaces are con-sidered faulty if one of the numbers of control points is exceeded.

The check is executed for all surface segments that contain control points.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum allowed number of control points fo r w ho l e t he su r -f ac e (product of the number of control points in u and v directions).

w Specify here the maximum allowed number of control points that may be situated in o n e o f t h e u o r v d i r ec t ions .



4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.1.18 Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree Greater

than 1 in Solid/SKD [G-SU-ID]

Geometry – Solid/SKD – Surfaces – Planar Surfaces with Polynomial Degree Greater than 1 in Solid/SKD [G-SU-ID]

Description:

This criterion is conceived to exclude the existence of planar surfaces with polynomial degree greater than 1. The criterion checks surfaces with polynomial degree greater than 1 whether they contain segments for which the distance of the measurement points to the mean plane is within the tolerance range (thus being considered plane). These surfaces are considered faulty.

q

Check Parameters:

q Define here the tolerance for the distance that may be between the measurement points and the mean plan for which the segments are considered to be plane..

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.2 Face Edges

Bounded surfaces, also simply called “faces“ describe the geometrical surface of an object, where applicable, including holes, cuts, etc. on the said surface with the projected, (arbitrarily complex) border curves. The boundary curve should be understood as a closed curve.

This association between surfaces and faces leads to the fact that many of the quality criteria generally apply to both.

4.8.7.2.1 Large Face Edge Segment Gap in Solid/SKD

[G-ED-LG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Edges— Large Face Edge Segment Gap in Solid/SKD [G-ED-LG]

Description:

Gaps and overlays of segments of boundaries can lead to problems related to their consis-tency; difficulties can arise in the definition of the face, while sharp bends and curvature jumps can be constructively intended.

q

Check Parameters:

q Border curves are evaluated as faulty if partial segments have gaps that exceed the given distance.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.2.2 Tiny Face Edge in Solid/SKD [G-ED-TI]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Edges— Tiny Face Edge in Solid/SKD [G-ED-TI]

Description:

The border curve of a face consists of numerous curves. Border curves with a length less then a certain value can lead to degenerate elements and gaps for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision) or during processing (NC). These elements are often the undesired result of rounding off, or of ”closing mechanisms”.

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Border curves (edge) are defined as faulty if they are shorter than the given value.

we



T I P :

For a new limited surface summarize the edge curve with adjacent edge curves, or delete/increase the mini edge curve and correct the following elements accordingly.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.2.3 Tiny Face Edge Segment in Solid/SKD [G-ED-TI]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Edges— Tiny Face Edge Segment in Solid/SKD [G-ED-TI]

Description:

The individual border curves (edges consist of numerous partial segments. Partial seg-ments can occur, when composite curves are created, or they exist as arcs in polynomial curves.

Partial segments with a length less then a certain value can lead to degenerate elements and gaps for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision) or during processing (NC). These elements are often the undesired result of rounding off, or of ”closing mechanisms”.

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Partial segments are evaluated as faulty if they are short of the given value.

w It can be chosen here, whether the number of the measurement points is entered explicitly, or if they are to be adopted directly from CATIA. If the information is adopted from CATIA, then the discretization points of the partial segment are implemented.

e Entry of the number of measurement points. This value is taken for every partial segment.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.2.4 Fragmented Face Edge in Solid/SKD [G-ED-FG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Edges—Fragmented Face Edge in Solid/SKD [G-ED-FG]

Description:

An unnecessary large amount of segments within a boundary increases the danger of mini-elements, as well as inconsistencies and complicates alterations.

q

Check Parameters:

q The criterion is evaluated as faulty if the amount of segments within the boundary exceeds the given value.


T I P :

Correct or replace the boundaries and generate the face with them again.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.3 Face Loops

4.8.7.3.1 Large Face Edge Gap in Solid/SKD [G-LO-LG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Loops— Large Face Edge Gap in Solid/SKD [G-LO-LG]

Description:


q

Check Parameters:

q Border curves are evaluated as faulty if there are gaps that exceed the specified distance.


T I P :

Limit again the boundary ends within the tolerance for identical points. The preference is to adapt the curve ends, not to insert mini segments.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.3.2 Sharp Face Edge Angle in Solid/SKD [G-LO-SA]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Loops— Sharp Face Edge Angle in Solid/SKD [G-LO-SA]

Description:

The present criterion checks if the angle between two boundary curves is not smaller than the specified minimum value. If the angle is smaller than this minimum value, the criterion is considered not fulfilled.

q

Check Parameter:

q Angle less than spinner

Specify here the minimum admissible value for the angle (in degrees).


NOTE:

This criterion is not to be used if in the construction there are acute angles that are deliberately used by the designer.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.3.3 Self-Intersecting Face Loop in Solid/SKD [G-LO-IS,

G-FA-IS]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Loops— Self-Intersecting Face Loop in Solid/SKD [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Description:

This criterion comprises self-intersection and self-contact of boundary curves, but also reciprocal intersection and contact of (exterior/interior) boundary curves.

Self-intersection or reciprocal intersection and contact of boundary curves as a result of a too less distance can, when the tolerance zone is changed, cause the invalidity of faces (loss of the face definition) as well as the loss of the closeness of topologies.

This criterion checks on the observance of a specified minimal distance between different composite curves or the segments of one and the same composite curve. If the specified distance is not observed, this will be rated as fault.

q w e r

Check Parameters:



we


r If this option is activated, only real intersection points will be marked, but not points of contact (distances below the tolerance). If this option is deactivated, points of contact and intersection points will be marked.


4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :

Increase the distance between the boundaries, remove the loops, perhaps divide the boundaries or summarize the surfaces.

4.8.7.3.4 Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop in

Solid/SKD [G-LO-IT]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Face Loops— Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop in Solid/SKD [G-LO-IT]

Description:

The curves of a face’s boundary loops should have a uniform orientation. This criterion checks whether in boundary loops are curves with different orientation. The existence of such an inconsistent orientation of boundary curves is considered as fault; boundary curves whose orientation differs from the orientation of the majority of the boundary curves will be marked faulty.

Check Parameters:


T I P :

If necessary, turn partially around the direction of rotation and produce the face again.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.4 Faces

4.8.7.4.1 Tiny Face in Solid/SKD [G-FA-TI]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Faces— Tiny Face in Solid/SKD [G-FA-TI]

Description:

Elements with the length less than a certain value can lead to degenerated elements and gaps, for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the transfer of data (into a system with lower precision), or during processing (NC).

q w e

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum extension of faces. Faces will be considered mini-elements and thus faulty if their extension is less than the specified value.

we



T I P :

Delete or increase the small faces and adapt the neighbouring elements accordingly.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.4.2 Narrow Face in Solid/SKD [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Faces— Narrow Face in Solid/SKD [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Description:

Elements with length less than a certain value can lead to degenerated elements and gaps, for particular geometrical operations (e.g. scaling, offsetting), during the exchange of data (into a system with lower precision), or during processing (NC).

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q Faces are evaluated as faulty if they are narrow – their expansion falls shorter than the given value.

we


r If this button is activated, faces are evaluated as faulty if only a part of the face is narrow.

T I P :

Delete or enlarge the narrow elements and adapt the neighbouring elements accordingly.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.4.3 Embedded Faces in Solid/SKD [G-FA-EM]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Faces— Embedded Faces in Solid/SKD [G-FA-EM]

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model there are identical faces, i. e. faces that are an identical (congruent) copy of an other face. If the Check also for partial ly identical option is activated, it will be also checked whether there exist identical faces, lying inside an other face. The existence of identical faces is considered as fault.

q w

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum distance between two elements, where they are still regarded as identical.

w If this option is activated, in addition to the elements that are completely congruent, also elements will be considered as identical that lie inside of an other face.


T I P :

Delete the double elements. Watch that the required element remains.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.4.4 Large Face Edge to Surface Gap in Solid/SKD

[G-FA-EG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Faces— Large Face Edge to Surface Gap in Solid/SKD [G-FA-EG]

Description:


q

w

e

r

Check Parameters:

q If a 3D-boundary curve exists, the projection distance is checked.

w The maximum distance between the boundary and the surface, where they are still correct, is entered here.

er



T I P :

Form the boundaries always in the tolerance-area of identical elements as intersection-curves or projections; perhaps generate it again accordingly.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.5 Shells/Volumes

4.8.7.5.1 Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume in Solid/SKD

[G-SH-FR]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes— Open or Overlapping Shell/Volume in Solid/SKD [G-SH-FR]

Description:

This criterion checks the boundary contours of a topology for their closeness. Closed contours are rated as error free, open contours and multiple knots are rated as errors.

This criterion checks only B-REP topologies of Solids/SKD.

q w e r t y

Check Parameters:

q If this option is activated, a l l contours of the topology are displayed even if they are not incorrect.

w If this option is activated, a check will be executed for gaps within the topology. Gaps that are smaller than the tolerance value, set in the spinner box e will be rated as a fault.

e Set the tolerance value for the gaps.

r If this option is activated, closed identical boundaries will not be rated as error if they are tangent continuous.

t Set the tolerance value for tangent discontinuity.

4 . C R I T E R I A


y If this option is activated, gaps within the topology that are only partially smaller than the tolerance will be rated as error.


4.8.7.5.2 Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD

[G-SH-LG]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes— Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SH-LG]

Description:

Per definition, the faces and their compounds describe the surfaces of parts and resources. Special meaning is given to the consistency of the limited surfaces amongst themselves.

Point consistency, which means the transition of limited surfaces within a given topology, is the most important quality feature within the surface compound. An inconsistency that does not meet the tolerance requirements can lead to the loss of the topology, in the case of a change in system or Model Dimension, or kick off an automatic correction (healing) in some systems. This can result in unintended changes, or the appearance of new mini-elements.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q The maximum distance that two neighboring segment borders may have in regards to an adjustable amount of measurement points, is entered here.

we


4 . C R I T E R I A



• the continuity should be checked at the corresponding limit points. This option makes only sense if the tolerance for the calculation of the topology is smaller or equal to the value that is adjusted under point .




T I P :


4.8.7.5.3 Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD

[G-SH-NT]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes— Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NT]

Description:

Normals consistency may have an effect on the milling ability or on the surface quality.


q w e r t

4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:

qw

The difference between the angles of the normals of two segments along their mutual border, determined in regards to an adjustable amount of measurement points, are calculated here. If the resulting angle is greater than the value À and less than the value Á, then the topology is considered faulty.

er


t It can be chosen here if

• the continuity should be checked at the corresponding limit points. This option makes only sense if the tolerance for the calculation of the topology is smaller or equal to the value that is adjusted under point q;

• the continuity should be checked in the projectable limit points;



4.8.7.5.4 Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD

[G-SH-NS]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes— Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NS]

Description:

Curvature discontinuities may have an effect on the milling ability or on the surface quality.

This criterion checks only skins and volumes; free faces only are considered if the „Calculation of topologies“ criterion 4.8.6.1 Calculation of Shells/Volumes [G-SH-xx2F] is executed before (see page 292).

4 . C R I T E R I A


q w e

r t y

Check Parameters:






R2R1||||

||+

−


rt


y It can be chosen here if





4 . C R I T E R I A


T I P :


4.8.7.5.5 Sharp Face Angle in Solid/SKD [G-SH-SA]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes—Sharp Face Angle in Solid/SKD [G-SH-SA]

Description:

If the angle at the common edge between two neighboring faces is too small, then sharp edges or incisions can be a result. These areas can not be produced. They result from, e. g. subtracting a cylinder from a cube.

q w e r

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum admissible value for the angle between two surface normals adjacent to each other. If there will be found an angle that is greater than the value specified here, the transition will be considered faulty.

we






4 . C R I T E R I A



T I P :

Examine the construction.

4.8.7.5.6 Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell/Volume

in Solid/SKD [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes— Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell/Volume in Solid/SKD [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]

Description:

The uniform alignment of the surface normals within a topology is required for determin-ing the processing direction for milling, for the display of shading, as well as for the determining of the drafting ability, or for the definition of the direction of touching for measurements.

Check Parameters:


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.5.7 Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes—Self-Intersecting Shell/Volume [G-SH-IS, G-SO-IS]

Description:

The present criterion checks the topology on points where self-intersection takes place. The existence of self-intersection is considered as fault. (For the further development it is planned to check topologies also on too close self-contact.)

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the minimal distance that a detected intersection point (point of self-intersection of a face) may have to the boundary. If the intersection point is situated too close to the boundary, this will be not rated as self-intersection.

4.8.7.5.8 Over-Used Edge in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NM]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes— Over-Used Edge in Solid/SKD [G-SH-NM]

Description:

It is important for the topological uniqueness of a surface that each interior surface must have only o ne definite neighboring surface, what means that it may have one neighboring border at the most and would therefore be free of ramifications.

However, it is permitted that a surface border borders numerous neighboring surface borders one after another (T-shaped connector).


4 . C R I T E R I A


Check Parameters:


T I P :

Delete superfluous elements.

4.8.7.5.9 Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—Shells/Volumes—Over-Used Vertex [G-SH-OU]

Description:

The present criterion checks how many edges use a vertex. If the number of edges that come together in a vertex is greater than the specified number, this will be rated as a fault.

q

Check Parameters:

q Specify here the maximum admissible number of edges.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.6 General

4.8.7.6.1 Multi-Volume Solid [G-SO-MU]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—General— Multi-Volume Solid [G-SO-MU]

Description:

This criterion checks whether in the model are solids that consist of more than one body. The existence of such bodies is rated as fault.

Check Parameters:


T I P :

The individual bodies must be converted into individual solids e.g. by can-celling the union operation. After that for each body a solid exists. With the exchange over STEPS this occurs automatically.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.6.2 Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—General—Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI]

Description:

This criterion checks whether solids have the specified minimal dimensions. Solids with dimensions less than the dimensions specified in this criterion are considered faulty.

q w e r

t

Check Parameters:

q Specify the numeric value of the maximal allowed extension that solids can have to be considered to be still a mini-element. It is checked if there are solids that in all their extensions are smaller than this specified value. These solids are considered faulty.

w If this check box is activated, solids will be considered faulty also if their extension in t w o only directions of space is less than the value specified under q.

e If this check box is activated, solids will be considered faulty also if their extension in o ne only direction of space is less than the value specified under q.

r If this check box is activated, also solids will be considered violated that have only one or a few of domains (volumes) smaller than the value specified with the spinner box q. For that, there are evaluated the dimensions of every individual, separate volume.


4 . C R I T E R I A



t If the Heal option is activated, the mini-elements will be deleted.

NOTE:

The creation of solids the dimension of which is less than a certain value should be avoided. These elements often are created unintentionally in the modelling process, for instance as the result of a small intersection of two solids. For these elements can arise problems when transferred to other systems, they can even get lost. Technologically such mini-elements can not be produced.

T I P :

Mini-elements should be removed completely or should be avoided by adapting the base elements.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.6.3 Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—General—Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM]

Description:

This criterion checks whether there are identical solids in the model. The existence of identical solids is considered as fault.

q w e r t y

u

Check Parameters:



w Check also for partial ly identical check box


e r


4 . C R I T E R I A


t When this option is activated, for the comparison not only the edge points of the solids faces will be used, but also the points lying inside the faces. This will make the comparison more accurate (e. g. it will be possible to distinguish between a complete cube and a cube one of the faces of which is erased), but will increase the computing time.

y If the option t „Check also for inner points of faces” is activated, here must be specified the number of measurement points that are to be created inside the 2D bounding box of the face in u- and v-directions.(e. g. for “5” five rows of measure-ment points will be created each consisting of 5 points). For the evaluation of the solids there will be used the measurement points lying inside of the faces.



u If „Heal“ is activated, identical solids are deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.7.6.4 Solid Void [G-SO-VO]

Geometry—Solid/SKD—General—Solid Void [G-SO-VO]

Description:

Solids in the model are checked for cavities. That means the extracted volume has inner domains.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.8 Drawing

4.8.8.1 Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI]

Geometry—Drawing—Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI]

Description:

This criterion checks whether drawing geometries contain mini-elements (i. e. elements, the extension of which is less than a specified value). The existence of mini-elements is considered as fault.

q

w

Check Parameters:

q Enter here the numeric value for the minimum length of elements of the drawing geometry. Elements will be considered mini-elements and thus faulty if their length is less than the specified value.



w If the healing option is activated, mini-elements will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.8.2 Tiny Drawing Element Segment [G-DW-TI]

Geometry—Drawing—Tiny Drawing Element Segment [G-DW-TI]

Description:

This criterion refers to curves that consist of a number of arcs. The curves are examined for their minimal stretch of the individual arcs, with the aid of a tolerance value.

q

Check Parameters:

q Mini segments (arcs) are evaluated as faulty if their length is smaller than the entered value.


4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.8.3 Embedded Drawing Elements [G-DW-EM]

Geometry—Drawing—Embedded Drawing Elements [G-DW-EM]

Description:

This criterion checks whether drawing geometries contain identical or partially identical elements. The existence of such elements is rated as fault.

q w e

r

Check Parameters:

q Enter the numeric value of the maximum separation which may exist between elements for them to still be considered identical.

w If this button is pressed, then only elements of the same type will be compared to each other, e.g. lines with lines and curves with curves.

e If this option is selected, elements that are partially congruent also will be considered identical (e.g. when a short line lies on a longer one or inversely).



r If „Heal“ is activated, identical elements will be deleted.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.8.8.4 High-Degree Drawing Element [G-DW-HD]

Geometry—Drawing—High-Degree Drawing Element [G-DW-HD]

Description:

The degree of polynomial definition for a curve segment determines the amount of degree of freedom for a curve. The greater the degree is, the higher is the complexity of a curve. Curves with a high polynomial degree are susceptible to undesired curvature and have to be approximated when switching over to another CAD system.

q

Check Parameters:

q The maximum acceptable polynomial degree is defined here.


T I P :

Avoid high polynomial degrees (> degree 9). Polynomial degrees up to 6 have proven to be the most practical. Subdivide complex curves into indi-vidual curves with a low polynomial degree.

4 . C R I T E R I A


4.9 Plugins

Plug-ins are modules that add to the existing criteria and functions specific criteria and functions meeting company-specific requirements.

Plug-ins must be put in the catalog .../adminV5/environment/plugin .

NOTE:

In the most of companies the right of integrating plug-ins is left to the administrator.

5 . O N L I N E - H E L P


5. Online-Help

For the Q-CHECKER the following online help is available.

Q-CHECKER Help button

When this button is clicked, a PDF file with the user manual is opened. Individual topics can be selected using index.

(Pre-requisite: ADOBE ACROBAT READER must be installed.)

PDQ Help button

When this button is clicked, a viewer or browser for HTML, PDF, text or other file is opened to display a company specific product data quality guideline.

What exactly will be opened, when the button is pressed, depends on the specifications in the Q-CHECKER script (qcheckerV4).


After clicking on this button, for the selected criterion or element a browser with criteria-specific help is opened. This help includes normally illustrations, the problem description, a suggested solution, and an application tip.


6 . A D M I N I S T R A T I O N


6. Administration

This chapter contains information, enabling the system administrator to customize Q-CHECKER according to firm-specific needs. The configuration files described below are situated in the Q-CHECKER admin directory. In the configuration files there is further detailed information contained about customization.

6.1 Element Selection

The elements to be included in a specific are grouped in so called e l e m e n t s e l e c t i o n se t s . As normally checks are executed model type-dependent, to every model type an appropriate element selection set is attributed. This latter then will determine which elements of the respective model type are to be checked. Q-CHECKER has no restrictions for the number of element selection sets; hence it is possible to define for one model type or for a specific check task se ve ra l alternative element selection sets. In the working process, by the means of the Model Type Default Element Selection option (see page 77), these sets can be flexibly attributed to the model type (interchanged).

When defining the check profile for the normal model-type-dependent check in the Element selection list box of the criteria the default “Use default element selection” option is to be maintained, so that the element selection set attributed to the model type will control the element selection.

If for certain criteria of a model type it is desired to use an other element selection set than the default set for the respective model type, in the Element selection list box an other element selection set can be activated. To be activated, this settings must be saved in the model type check profile. Settings that not have been saved for the checks not are considered—not even temporarily.

A detailed instruction how to proceed you can find in chapter 6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles on page 379—step (8) Select the elements.



6.2 Element Groups

In certain list boxes of certain criteria you can find, in addition to the usual CATIA V4 element names, also element group names, that allow a simple and quick multi selection of several elements (as for example *SPC, *LN, *PT). These groups are Q-CHECKER V4-

specific. In the following table is shown which elements comprised are in these groups.

Element Group Comprised Elements

• ALL all CATIA elements

• WIREFRAME *PT; *LN ; *CRV_(CIR); *CRV_(ELL); *CRV_(PAR); *CRV_(HYP); *CRV; *CRV_(BSPL); *CRV_(NRBC); *CCV; EDGE

• SURFACE *PLN; SUPPORT_PLANE; *SUR; *SUR_(BSRF); *SUR_(NRBS); *NET; *FAC; *SKI; *SKD; *VOL

• SOLID *POL; *SOL (SOLM_WITHOUT_HISTORY); *SOL (SOLM_WITH_HISTORY); *SOL (SOLE_VOLUME_PRIMITIVE); *SOL (SOLE)

• DRAW_BASIC_GEOMETRY *PTD; *LND; *CIRD; *ELLD; *PARD; *HYPD; *SPLD



6.3 QCHECKER.par—General Q-CHECKER Settings

Q-CHECKERs general settings are to be made in the QCHECKER.par file. In the following table the keywords for the settings and their parameters will be described in the following table.


EN • Standard language English DE • Standard language German

qchecker. DEFAULT_LANGUAGE

JP • Standard language Japanese YES • Additional report files in HTML and TXT

format are created qchecker. WRITE_REPORT_HTML NO • No additional report files are created.

qchecker. CHECK_REPORT_ STANDARDIZED

YES • An additional report file is created according to VDA4955/Odette.

YES • A check seal in form of a point in the axis system center is generated. qchecker.

CHECK_SEAL_POINT NO • No check seal is generated. YES • The batch run result is displayed in the

HTML-Browser. qchecker.CALL_BROWSER_ FOR_BATCH_OUTPUT NO • The batch run result is displayed in the

text file editor. YES (default) • For space-saving, the XML files of the

<checkprofilename>. qcprofile type will be compressed.

qchecker. COMPRESS_PROFILE

NO • Compressing will not take place. YES • A check seal is inscribed in the MODEL

COMMENT of the CATIA-model qchecker. CHECK_SEAL_COMMENT NO • No check seal is inscribed.

STANDARD • An invisible s t a n d a r d check seal is generated in the form of an UDB (user def ined block).

EXTENDED • An invisible e x t e n d e d check seal is generated in the form of an UDB (user def ined block).

qchecker. CHECK_SEAL_APPLICATION

NO • No invisible UDB check seal is generated. YES • An external check seal file in XML format

will be generated. qchecker. CHECK_SEAL_EXTERNAL NO • An external check seal file in XML format

will n o t be generated. YES • For every faulty element in the file

*.qcprofile the workspace and the layer will be indicated.

qchecker. PROTOCOL_WRITE_ WSP_LAYER

NO • Workspace and layer will be not indicated.




YES • In the batch run report table, the number of faulty elements per error category will be indicated.

qchecker. CHECKER_OUT_TABEL_SUM_ ENTITIES NO • In the batch run report table, the number

of criteria considered violated will be indicated.

qchecker. CRITERIA_DEFAULT_SHAPE

TRIANGLE, TRIANGLE_UP, TRIANGLE_DOWN, TRIANGLE_LEFT, TRIANGLE_RIGHT

DIAMOND, CIRCLE, SQUARE, SQUARE_ ROUNDED

• Standard symbol for criteria identification

qchecker. KO_CRITERIA_COLOR

RED_ORANGE, ORANGE, RED, ORANGE_YELLOW, YELLOW, BLUE, LIGHT_BLUE,

PINK, GREEN, CYAN, BLACK, WHITE, DARK_RED

• Color identification for interruption (abort) criteria

qchecker. KO_CRITERIA_WEIGHT

<INTEGER> • Weight for a abort criterion


YES • The Q-CHECKER batch run results will be registered in the database. qchecker.

DB_CONNECT_BATCH NO • The Q-CHECKER batch run results will not be registered in the database.

YES • The Q-CHECKER interactive check re-sults will be registered in the data-base. qchecker.

DB_CONNECT_INTERACTIVE NO • The Q-CHECKER interactive check results will not be registered in the database.

INTERNAL • For the visualization of the Q-CHECKER online help an internal browser is used. qchecker.

DEFAULT_BROWSER EXTERNAL • For the visualization of the Q-CHECKER online help an external browser is used.

YES • Identifier for drawing geometry will be written in the report. qchecker.

CREATE_IDENTIFIERS_DEFAULT NO • Identifier for drawing geometry will not be written in the report files.

YES • Model selection in the UNIX model tree from within the Batch Settings window is available. qchecker.

ALLOW_FILETREE NO • The UNIX model tree is n o t available

for model selection.




YES • If the check seal control results in a checksum error, the Inval id check seal assessment is displayed. qchecker.

USE_SEAL_FAILED_ASSESSMENT NO • If the check seal control results in a checksum error, the Interrupt cr i ter ion fa i led assessment is displayed.

YES • If in a model check a general error has occurred, the model assessment “General Error” will be edited.

qchecker. ENABLE_GENERAL_ERROR_ ASSESSMENT

NO (default) • General errors that occur during model checks not will be taken into account for the model assessment. (This can result in a positive model assessment even if the model was not checked at all.)

When the Analys is window is opened, the following elements will be displayed:

ALL • a l l elements CORRECT • c o r r e c t elements only HEALED • c o r r e c t e d elements only VIOLATED • violated elements only

qchecker. DEFAULT_SHOW_FILTER

GENERAL_ERROR • elements with general errors only ON • The model name is u s e d as report

name. The option is permanently switched on

OFF • The model name is n o t used as report name. The option is perma-nently switched off.

qchecker. USE_MODEL_AS_REPORT

BOTH (default) • The option can be switched on or of by the user. Respectively, the model name is u s e d o r n o t used as report name.

qchecker. DEFAULT_BATCH_MODE_ SELECTION

FILETREE, MODELFILE, SESSION (default)

• Selection of the default access option which is to be preselected when opening the batch settings dialog box

YES (default for UNIX)

• The active Q-CHECKER window is kept always in the f o r e g r o u n d . qchecker.

KEEP_WINDOWS_ON_TOP NO (default for WINDOWS)

• The active Q-CHECKER window is n o t kept in the foreground.




YES • In the Start window the respective button will be v i s i b l e .

qchecker. SHOW_BTN_CHECK_WITH_HEAL qchecker. SHOW_BTN_CHECK_WITHOUT_HEAL qchecker. SHOW_BTN_CHECK_BATCH qchecker. SHOW_BTN_EDIT_OPTIONS qchecker. SHOW_BTN_HELP qchecker. SHOW_BTN_INFO qchecker. SHOW_BTN_EXIT qchecker. SHOW_BTN_EDIT_PROFILE qchecker. SHOW_BTN_LOAD_REPORT qchecker. SHOW_BTN_LOAD_REPORT_HTML

NO • In the Start window the respective button will be h i d d e n .

YES • In the Analys is window the respec-tive button will be v i s i b l e .

qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_ENTITY_ZOOM qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_ENTITY_FINE qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_ENTITY_MARK qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_ENTITY_INFO qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_TREE_EXPLODE qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_TREE_IMPLODE qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_TREE_UP qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_TREE_DOWN qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_MISC_HEALALL qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_MISC_PROFILE qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_MISC_CRITERION qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_MISC_CRITHELP qchecker. SHOW_BTN_ANA_MISC_SETTINGS

NO • In the Analys is window the respec-tive button will be h i d d e n .



Example fi le:

# Define the default language # (allowed values: EN,JP,DE; default: EN) qchecker.DEFAULT_LANGUAGE EN # Write HTML and ASCII overview report # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.WRITE_REPORT_HTML YES # Create point stamp in model # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.CHECK_SEAL_POINT NO # Create comment # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.CHECK_SEAL_COMMENT NO # Create application # (allowed values: STANDARD,EXTENDED,NO; default: NO) qchecker.CHECK_SEAL_APPLICATION NO # Write workspace and layer information for each element to reference report # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.REPORT_WRITE_WSP_LAYER NO

# In the batch output file summary table, for each error priority, # only sum up the faulty criteria (NO) or also the faulty elements/entities # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.CHECKER_OUT_TABEL_SUM_ENTITIES NO

# Default shape for criteria (default is circle) # Available shapes are: CIRCLE, SQUARE, SQUARE_ROUNDED, TRIANGLE, # TRIANGLE_UP, TRIANGLE_DOWN, TRIANGLE_LEFT, # TRIANGLE_RIGHT, DIAMOND qchecker.CRITERIA_DEFAULT_SHAPE CIRCLE # Displayed color and optionally shape for Abort Criteria (default is black) # Available colors are: RED, RED_ORANGE, ORANGE, ORANGE_YELLOW, # YELLOW, BLUE, LIGHT_BLUE, PINK, GREEN, CYAN, # BLACK, WHITE, DARK_RED # Available shapes are: CIRCLE, SQUARE, SQUARE_ROUNDED, TRIANGLE, # TRIANGLE_UP, TRIANGLE_DOWN, TRIANGLE_LEFT, # TRIANGLE_RIGHT, DIAMOND # Examples: RED - use a red default shape # ORANGE@TRIANGLE - an orange triangle (same is TRIANGLE_UP) # WHITE@DIAMOND - a white diamond qchecker.KO_CRITERIA_COLOR BLACK@DIAMOND # Weight value for Abort Criteria qchecker.KO_CRITERIA_WEIGHT 81 # Write XML report for database connect in batch run # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.DB_CONNECT_BATCH NO # Write XML report for database connect in interactive run # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: NO) qchecker.DB_CONNECT_INTERACTIVE NO # Choose which browser to use for html-criterion-help # (allowed values: EXTERNAL,INTERNAL; default: INTERNAL) qchecker.DEFAULT_BROWSER INTERNAL # Default setting if the identifiers of violated entities should be # created in the model. # (allowed values: YES,NO; default: YES) qchecker.CREATE_IDENTIFIERS_DEFAULT NO



6.4 CRITERIA.par and TCACriterionTable.exe—

Criteria Management

The CRITERIA.par XML file can be used to manage the Q-CHECKER check criteria. Q-CHECKER is delivered without Q-CHECKER file, as Q-CHECKER can be run without this file.

The CRITERIA.par file can be generated by using the TCACriterionTable.exe file (see below in this chapter). This should be made if the user wants to benefit from the spec i a l f a c i l i t i e s that the CRITERIA.par file offers fo r the c r i t e r i a manage -ment :

• creating additional instances of existing criteria (i. e. criteria clones),

• deactivating criteria,

• creating new criteria folders (tab cards),

• renaming criteria names (not recommended) or naming criteria in an other language(in Q-CHECKER V4 possible only for languages, that do not need UNICODE character set, cf. below),

• renaming criteria folders,

• moving criteria to other folders,

• adding user-specific parameters to the criteria.

These facilities will be described more detailed in the following section “The TCACriterionTable.exe Criteria Editor”.

The file contains for each criterion the name and the folder name (both in the languages selected), the ID number (for criteria clones additionally the ID number of the original criterion), the keyword and the V4 or V5 attribute and the enabled attribute (yes/no). Additionally, every criterion can contain one or several custom parameters <customer_info name="…" type="…">…</customer_info>.

In principle, the above-mentioned adjustments (moving criteria, creating new folders, cloning of criteria etc.) could be made directly in the CRITERIA.par file.

NOTE:

As for this adjustments certain requirements must be observed (e. g. unambiguous criteria number, keywords in capitals without spaces, correct original ID number for criteria clones), and as manual editing implies a great error risk, we advise aga ins t effecting modifications manua l l y d i r ec t l y i n th i s f i l e , and recommend using for the



criteria management the TCACriterionTable.exe editor. This editor makes the criteria management much more comfortable.

Excerpt of the CRITERIA.par File

<criterion group="v4" id="1305" key="GEOHYBRIDMODEL" enabled="yes"> <name lang="EN">Hybrid Model [G-MO-HY]</name> <name lang="DE">Hybrid-Modell [G-MO-HY]</name> <folder lang="EN">Geometry\Model</folder> <folder lang="DE">Geometrie\Modell</folder> <customer_info name="HEALING_COST"

type="real">10,00</customer_info> </criterion>

<criterion group="v4" id="413153640" key="GEOHYBRIDMODEL_2" original_id="1305" enabled="yes">

<name lang="EN">Hybrid Model [G-MO-HY]_2</name> <name lang="DE">Hybrid-Modell [G-MO-HY]_2</name> <folder lang="EN">Geometry\Model</folder> <folder lang="DE">Geometrie\Modell</folder> </criterion>

The file excerpt contains the specifications for two criteria. The first criterion is an original Q-CHECKER criterion, the second is a clone criterion.



TCACriterionTable.exe—Editor for Criteria Management

q to t

y

u i

o

q • Generating CRITERIA.par f i le

Select menu item Edit > New > New V5 file.

For the further work with Q-CHECKER, the CRITERIA.par file must be saved in one of the environment directories of the adminV4 directory. It is possible to create for every environment a special CRITERIA.par file to accommodate requirements.

w • Language support

The TCACriterionTable.exe file supports UNICODE fonts, what means that it can edit the character sets of any Latin or non-Latin language (e. g. Asiatic charac-ters).

But, please, take into account that Q-CHECKER V4 does n o t support UNICODE. So the language support of the TCACriterionTable.exe file should be used only for the languages that can be edited without UNICODE.

w e

r t

y

iu

q

o



The Edit menu offers two facilities for language settings:

(1) Use r Language Here the graphic user interface language can be set. At the moment, only for English and German a complete language support is available.

(2) Used Languages : Here the language(s) can be set for editing the folder names and criteria names.

These language settings are independent from the Q-CHECKER language settings.

Re (2): Used Languages:

In the initial state of Q-CHECKER German and English are activated. These languages can be replaced or additional languages can be added using the Define Languages dialog box.

Here it is to be noted that Q-CHECKER V4, besides the complete German and English support, provides only a limited support for Japanese (browsing HTML help and report files and PDF help files). For all other languages, apart from English and German, the folder names and criteria names, specified in the TCACriterionTable.exe file, can be used only in this file itself.

To add a criteria language, in the Define Languages dialog box the corresponding 2-letter language code according to the ISO 639-1 standard is to be specified (cf. http://www.loc.gov/standards/iso639-2/langcodes.html). If entering several languages codes, they must be comma separated.

Then, a font must be selected that can edit the special character set of the respective language.

Once criteria names and folder names in an other language than German or English have been defined, this language for the TCACriterionTable.exe can be used as user language. In this case, in the folder box the folder names and criteria names defined in this language will be shown in this language, the rest of the graphic user interface as well as the folder names and criteria names that have not this language will be edited in English.

NOTE:

• If a Used Language that had been set for the current CRITERIA.par file is deleted, as a result after closing the CRITERIA.par a l l folder names and criteria names of this language in this file will be d e l e t e d . (As long as the CRITERIA.par file has been only saved, but the TCACriterionTable.exe has not been closed, the criteria names and the folder names of the deleted language are still available in the memory, what allows to reactivate them by resetting their language code.) After closing the TCACriterionTable.exe file, the



names are deleted definitely, and can not be restored by reactivating the respective language (even the names of the Q-CHECKER own folders and the criteria can not be restored). If an analog CRITERIA.par file that could be copied does not exist, the names of the original Q-CHECKER folders and criteria can only be recovered by generating a new CRITERIA.par file, after which all user-specific settings must be redone.

• When saving the QCHECKER.par file, pay attention to the following: The file must be saved under the name CRITERIA.par only, in the relevant environment directory (subdirectory of the adminV4 directory). If this file is saved under an other name or in an other directory than in the environment directory, it can not be analyzed by Q-CHECKER. In this case, Q-CHECKER can not apply the modifications specified in the CRITERIA.par file, and will work only with Q-CHECKER

standard criteria.

e • Creating New Folders

New folders can be created with the menu items Tree > New Root Folder and Tree > New Subfolder.

A new subfolder can be created only if a folder has been selected which should be the superordinate folder.

New folders always are inserted at the bottom (a new root folder at the bottom of whole the tree, a new subfolder at the bottom of the respective folder). Afterwards, they can be moved up (see below—Moving Criteria ).

NOTE:

An empty folder, that has no criteria, will by deleted by the program when saving.

• Expanding and Collapsing the Tree

With the menu items Tree > Expand All and Tree > Collapse All (or with the analogous commands of the context-sensitive menu of the tree or with the shortcuts indicated there) all the items of the tree respectively can be made visible or hidden.

• Renaming Folders

(1) Select the folder to be renamed.



(2) With the menu item Tree > Rename Folder (or with the analogous command of the context-sensitive menu of the tree or with the shortcuts indicated there) open the dialog “Rename folder” box.

NOTE:

Renaming the original Q-CHECKER folders and criteria is n o t r e c o m-m e n d e d , as this would complicate the support communication bet-ween user and TransCAT.

r • Moving Criteria

Moving criteria within a folder

Move a criterion, using the buttons “Up” or “Down” or by drag and drop of the marked criterion.

Moving criteria into an other folder

Mark the criterion and then drag and drop it in the new folder.

t y

• Cloning criteria

Cloning allows to create several instances of one criterion. This enables the user to execute several, different checks with different settings.

(1) Select the criterion to be copied.

(2) Press the Clone button t.

Now, under the selected criterion its copy will be inserted.

This criterion clone has an additional text box—“New Keyword” y. As the keywords of the criteria must unambiguous, and never must be doubled, in this text box automatically the keyword of the original criterion with a distinctive number suffix will be inserted.

NOTE:

• Not all criteria can be cloned what can be recognized by the symbol, preceding the name:

The criterion can be cloned (colored symbol).

Criterion clone—also can be cloned.

The criterion can not be cloned (gray symbol).

• The keyword can be changed by the user. If changing, avoid doubling existing keyword.



T I P :

Even criterion clones can be cloned. This allows to avoid re-doing settings that have been made for a criterion clone again for another criterion clone, having similar settings.

Example for the use of criterion clones:

A check profile should give different assessment for different elements that are found in models, e. g. 3D-Features should be rated KO, Solid-Bodies only with warning. For that purpose, the Permitted Element Types in Model criterion will be duplicated. The original criterion will be used for searching after 3D-Features (weight: KO criterion), the criterion clone can be used to search for SolidBodies (weight: Warning).

u • Changing Criteria Names

Criteria names can be changed by specifying the new name in the Name text box u of the respective language.

NOTE:

This facility should be used exclusively for user defined check criteria, not for the original TransCAT Q-CHECKER criteria.

Renaming the original TransCAT Q-CHECKER criteria should be a v o i d e d , as this would complicate the support communication between user and TransCAT.

i • Deactivating Criteria

All criteria—original as well as criteria clones—can be deactivated. The criteria and their settings will be maintained, the deactivated criteria only being no more dis-played in the Q-CHECKER check-profile editor.

If all criteria of a folder are deactivated, also the folder will be no more displayed.

D e a c t i v a t i n g C r i t e r i o n

Click the check box i, preceding the criterion name, so that the check mark disappears.

A c t i v a t i n g C r i t e r i o n :

Click the check box i, preceding the criterion name, so that the check mark reappears.



o • Adding user-specific parameters to the criteria.

To every check-criterion several user-specific parameters can be added, which, after export of the check results in a database, can be analyzed there. This can be useful to determine e. g. the amount of time that would be needed to heal a model, and the respective cost.

H o w t o p r o c e e d :

(1) Create the parameter: – Press the New switch, – Enter the keyword, Specify the data type (for data type CHAR, specify also the length). – Press the Apply button.

Note: If the Apply button not will be pressed, the specified values will be d i sca rded , as soon as a new parameter will be created or the program will be exited.

(2) Set the parameter value: – Select the criterion name, – Select the parameter, – Press the Edit switch, – Enter in the Value text box the value, to be set for the criterion. – Press the Apply button.

T I P :

The New, Edit and Erase buttons are t o gg l e switches. • If after pressing the New switch, you want abort the parameter

creation (or after pressing the Edit switch abort editing), this switch must be pressed again.

• If you want to delete a parameter selected, this must be confirmed by pressing once more the Delete switch. If you want to abort the delete procedure, an other parameter must be clicked.

NOTE:

The TCACriterionTable.exe program does no t check the parameter settings for their formal correctness. Therefore, when entering the parameter settings, pay attention to the following: • Keywords must start with a letter, within the keywords

no spaces and special characters are allowed. • Enter parameter values, that correspond to the data

type. • To separate the decimal places from the integers, use



the decimal point, not the comma (i. e. the English number notation, e. g.: 15.2).

If these conditions not will be observed, the data will not be accepted for the database, an error message will be edited.



6.5 PROFILE.par—Model Assessment

The names and numerical values for the grade of error, the qualifications of the tested models and for the processing groups are determined in the PROFILE.par files. The amount of lines per group can be chosen freely by the system administrator if no entry is made, then standard values will be taken. These files are dependent of the language, and therefore kept in subdirectories (e. g. /admin/lang_DE).


"<Text1>" • Name for the grade of error <numerical value>

• numerical value for the total sum

<Text2> • Color entry for the grade. Colors are defined in QCHECKER.par file.

qchecker. CRITERIA_WEIGHT

"<Text3>" • Name for the Model evaluation. Is required if the evaluation mode is set on MAX_PRIORITY in the QCHECKER.par file

"<Text1>" • Name of the model evaluation

qchecker. MODEL_ASSESSMENT

<numerical value>

• Numerical value that gives the minimal sum of the evaluation step. These entries must be made if the evaluation mode is set to SUM_WEIGHT in the QCHECKER.par file.

qchecker. CRITERIA_PROCESSING_GROUP

"<Text1>" • Name of the processing group



Example fi le:

# Define possible weights for criteria. # Add one line for each weight priority class: # qchecker.CRITERIA_WEIGHT "<Text1>" <Numeric value> <Text2> "<Text3>" # <Text1> Displayed text for the weight. # <Numeric value> Numeric value of the weight for total sum. # <Text2>[@<Text3>] A combined keyword, defining the correlated color, # and optionally a shape to be used. # Available colors are: RED, RED_ORANGE, ORANGE, ORANGE_YELLOW, # YELLOW, BLUE, LIGHT_BLUE, PINK, GREEN, CYAN # BLACK, WHITE, DARK_RED # Available shapes are: CIRCLE, SQUARE, SQUARE_ROUNDED, TRIANGLE, # TRIANGLE_UP, TRIANGLE_DOWN, TRIANGLE_LEFT, # TRIANGLE_RIGHT, DIAMOND # Examples: RED - use a red default shape # ORANGE@TRIANGLE - an orange triangle (same is TRIANGLE_UP) # white@diamond - a white diamond # <Text4> Text for model assessment if assessment mode is set to MAX_PRIORITY. # (see keyword qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT_MODE in admin/QCHECKER.par) qchecker.CRITERIA_WEIGHT "KO Criterion (81)" 81 DARK_RED "KO" qchecker.CRITERIA_WEIGHT "Major Error (27)" 27 RED "Faulty” qchecker.CRITERIA_WEIGHT "Error (9)" 9 RED_ORANGE "Faulty" qchecker.CRITERIA_WEIGHT "Major Defect (3)" 3 ORANGE "Defective" qchecker.CRITERIA_WEIGHT "Defect (1)" 1 YELLOW "IO" # Define possible assessments for model if assessment mode is set to SUM_WEIGHT. # (see keyword qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT_MODE in admin/QCHECKER.par) # Add one line for each model assessment class: # qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT "<Text1>" <Numeric value> # <Text1> Displayed text for model assessment. # <Numeric value> Minimum sum value of assessment class qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT " IO" 0 qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT "Faulty " 1 qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT "Defective " 9 qchecker.MODEL_ASSESSMENT "K.O." 81 # Define allowed processing groups # Add one line for each processing group: # qchecker.CRITERIA_PROCESSING_GROUP "<Text1>" # <Text1> Displayed text for processing group. qchecker.CRITERIA_PROCESSING_GROUP "Processing Group 1" qchecker.CRITERIA_PROCESSING_GROUP "Processing Group 2"



6.6 MODEL.type— Model-Type Dependent Check Profiles

In the MODEL.type file the system administrator can define conditions for the auto-matic identification of different model types (e.g. space model, drawing model, hybrid model). This automatic identification takes place, when the check is started with the Model Type Dependent Profi le option ac t i va ted (Modify Profi le window > Options tab card > Profi le Settings option, see page 72). In this case, by the means of

the MODEL.type file, the model is analyzed on the following items:

• defined character strings in the model name—see 6.6.1,

• defined character strings in the model comment—see 6.6.2,

• definite elements in the model—see 6.6.3,

• the layers on which it is situated—see 6.6.4

• the model dimension—see 6.6.5, and

• specified character strings in a User Defined Block (UDB) in the model—see 6.6.6.

For one model type one or several of the identification methods mentioned above can be used.

For the n umbe r of the model types that can be defined by the administrator as well as for their n ame s , in Q-CHECKER there are no restrictions.

The names of all model types, defined by the administrator in the MODEL.type file, are contained in the list box in the lower part of the Check-Profi le Editor (see section 4.1 Check-Profi le Editor on page 61). This list box is activated by activating the Model Type Dependent Profi le check box in the same window—Options tab card (see chapter 4.3.1 Profile Settings on page 72).

As a result of this analyze, the model type is identified automatically and the check profile is selected automatically, that corresponds to the model type.



S T E P - B Y - S T E P I N S T R U C T I O N — H o w t o c r e a t e a m o d e l t y p e d e p e n d e n t c h e c k p r o f i l e

(1) Create the MODEL.type file

The file is to be created in the Language-directory (e. g. …\adminV4\lang_EN). The model type declarations have a block structure, wherein every block line has a definite function:

Line Function

BEGIN_MODELTYPE Text_1 "Text_2"

Start of the model type definition • Text1: Model type name used in the *.qcprofile file;

• Text2: Model type name edited in the list box. If Text2 contains blanks, the text must be included in single quotation marks.

BEGIN_… Start of the definition of model type identification mode:

BEGIN_MODELNAME • identification by definite words in the model name

BEGIN_COMMENT • identification by definite words in the model comment

BEGIN_TYPE_ALLOWED/TYPE_NOTALLOWED • identification by definite elements

BEGIN_MODELDIMENSION • identification by model dimension

BEGIN_BLOCK (String / Element / Dimension) END_BLOCK

Definition of string / element / dimension (regular expressions can be used)

END_… End of the definition of model type identification mode

• END_MODELTYPE

End of model type definition



Example f i le

(Model type identification by definite strings in the model name)

BEGIN_MODELTYPE Modeltyp_1 "Modeltyp_1" BEGIN_MODELNAME BEGIN_BLOCK COLUMN 1 "TYP_1" END_BLOCK END_MODELNAME END_MODELTYPE

BEGIN_MODELTYPE Modeltyp_2 "Modeltyp_2" BEGIN_MODELNAME BEGIN_BLOCK COLUMN 1 "^[A-C]" END_BLOCK END_MODELNAME END_MODELTYPE

BEGIN_MODELTYPE Modeltyp_3 "Modeltyp_3" BEGIN_MODELNAME BEGIN_BLOCK COLUMN 1 "^[0-9]{3}" END_BLOCK END_MODELNAME END_MODELTYPE

(2) Open empty check profile („NOTHING“)

The empty profile is delivered with Q-CHECKER.

(3) Activate the Model Type-Dependent Check Profi le check box on the Options tab card.

On the window bottom, the Model Type list box with the Standard settings is activated.

(4) Define the Standard Settings

In the Standard Settings, the criteria are to be defined, that apply to all model types. (If a model can not be assigned to none of the model types, it will be checked with the



Standard settings.) On the base of these standard settings, in the following the model type dependent check profiles will be defined.

(5) Apply the standard settings to all other model types

The Apply values to al l other model types button is activated only if before:

• the Model Type-Dependent Check Profi le check box has been activated—see step (3).

• in the Model Type-list box has been selected „Standard Settings“.

ATTENTION:

Press this button o n l y o n c e .

When pressing the button t w i c e , the model type dependent check profiles will be r e se t t o t he s t an d ard se t t ings (all criteria, that have been activated additionally to the stan-dard settings, will be deactivated again, and all criteria, that have been deactivated in comparison to the standard settings, will be activated again), cf. step (7) Add / deselect criteria specific to model type selected .

(6) Select Model Type

Select the model type in the model type list box (cf. above).

(7) Add / deselect criteria specific to model type selected

Change the standard settings for your model types, adding criteria specific to the model type selected or deactivating criteria

(8) Select the elements

Select for the model type the elements to be checked, by assigning to the model type an element selection set. (See chapter 4.3.5 Model Type Default Element Selection on page 77. If, for specific criteria, the element selection should be independent of the model type, select in the respective criteria box with the Element selection set to used list box a different element selection set (see 4.2 Standard Parameters and Elements on page 66).



ATTENTION:

The steps (6) Select Model Type, (7) Add / deselect criteriaspecif ic to model type selected and (8) Select the elements must be executed for e ac h of the model types.

(9) Save the model type dependent check profile

The saved model type dependent check profiles in the following will be available in the list box with the predefined check profiles.

NOTE:

The settings must be saved in a check profile (see chapter 4.1 Check-Profi le Editor—explications for the Save temporari ly button on page 63 and Save button on page 63).

Without saving the settings can not be used—even not temporarily—and will be discarded when closing the profile editor.

6.6.1 Model type identification by model name

With the MODELNAME keyword definitions can be made in order to search in the model name for a definite character string, starting at a definite position (keyword COLUMN).

6.6.2 Model type identification by file comment

With the DESCIPTION keyword definitions can be made in order to search in the file comment for a definite character string at a definite position (keyword COLUMN) in a defi-nite line (keyword LINE).

6.6.3 Model type identification by element type

Generally all elements types are allowed. Consequently, elements not allowed have to be excluded with the keyword TYPE_NOTALLOWED. To allow again subsets of the excluded

element groups the keyword TYPE_ALLOWED is used. Cf. 6.6.4 Model type identif ication by layer (ON_LAYER).



6.6.4 Model type identification by layer (ON_LAYER)

• Model type identification by layer numbers combined with feature types:

BEGIN_TYPE ON_LAYER "7-9" TYPE_NOTALLOWED ALL TYPE_ALLOWED CURVE TYPE_ALLOWED POINT END_TYPE

Key word Function

ON_LAYER Definition of the layers • Layer numbers must be enclosed in double apostrophes

• Several layer numbers must be separated by comma: "1,2,3" • Series of several layers: "n-m" • All layers until a definite layer: "-n" • All layers until a definite Layer: "m-" • All layers: "-" (only minus sign)

TYPE_NOTALLOWED Exclusion of feature types TYPE_ALLOWED Allow feature types

The TYPE_NOTALLOWED key word is used to exclude feature types (i. e. the model type must not contain these element types), the key word TYPE_ALLOWED is used to admit feature types (i. e. the model type must contain one of these feature types). To make the definition easier, group identifiers (e. g. ALL) can be used (in the example above, all elements are excluded, but curves and points are admitted, i. e. as model type all models are defined which contain curves and/or points and which are situated on the layers 7 to 9). Consider the order of TYPE_NOTALLOWED and TYPE_ALLOWED—if in the example above TYPE_NOTALLOWED stood behind TYPE_ALLOWED, the admitted points and curves would be excluded again by TYPE_NOTALLOWED ALL, n o element at all consequently being admitted.

6.6.5 Model type recognition by model dimension

The keyword MODELDIMENSION defines the value of the model dimension as a real number.



6.6.6 Model type identification by strings in a UDB

User-defined blocks (UDB) are hidden texts that can be attached by the user (administra-tor) to an element and that can be identified by their ID (APPLICATION_STRING) and their type (UDB_Type) as well by the element to which they are attached (ENTITY or ENTITY_IDENTIFIER).With the following UDB keywords it can be searched in the text of the UDBs for the existence of a specified string which is used as identification for the model type:

APPLICATION_STRING: Specify the UDB identifier which is to be searched.

ENTITY or ENTITY_IDENTIFIER: The UDB is searched by means of the element, to which the UDB is attached. The keyword ENTITY allows a selection between the ele-ment types *MASTER and *AXS1. If no specification is made, automatically *MASTER will be selected. Instead of ENTITY, the keyword ENTITY_IDENTIFIER can be set —in this case it will be searched for elements with this identifier (the precondition is that the UDB is situa-ted in the Master-Workspace ).

UDB_TYPE: Specify the UDB type (1-16000).

COLUMN: Specify the string which is to be searched in the UDB. After this keyword specify instead of column the figure of the character position, starting from which the string is to be searched; instead of string—the string itself that is to be searched. (If instead of column no figure is specified, the comparison is started from character position 1).

T I P :

For the definition of the model identification conditions, Bo o l e an o p e ra -t o rs can be used. This allows to include in the model type identification not only one, but several of the above described identification features.

6.7 TEMPLATE.html—HTML Check Report Template

The TEMPLATE.html files are the templates on the base of which the HTML report files are generated; they are in the DEFAULT/lang_XX/ directory. These template files as well as the HTML report files generated on their base are language-dependent (at present German—DE, English—DE, Japanese—JP). In the TEMPLATE.html files the administrator can change the corporate logo to be used, the output tables to be generated and the encoding. To do so, a text editor or an HTML editor is to be used. Which tables will be edited in the check reports can be controlled by the keywords below—every keyword controls that in the HTML report file a definite table is inserted.

Keyword Table

TcChkTableOrgInformation • Organizational information

TcChkTableErrorsPriority • Listing: number of errors per priority

TcChkTableErrorsCriterion • Listing:

number of errors per check criterion

• Listing: number of errors per element TcChkTableErrorsElement /

Alternative: TcChkTableErrorsViolatedCriterionsOfElement

• Alternative: Listing: number of errors per element with violated criterion

TcChkTableErrorsEntitiesinCriterion • Listing: Error elements per criterion

TcChkTableErrorsinRoutines • Listing: Errors in routines

To ensure that the character set of the respective language is edited correctly, in the metadata section, possibly, the encoding (i. e. the character set used to display the text information) must be set correctly (keyword charset=<!—TcCodecName-->). When the setting is made correctly, the required character set is selected automatically every time when opening the HTML site; otherwise the character set must be selected manually every time again (cf. Selecting character set for *.out and *.out.html Output Files on page 55).] Since Q-CHECKER V4 1.10 it is possible to select between Latin-1 and Unicode UTF-8 encoding (for previous version only Latin-1 is possible.).

<meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html; charset=">



6.8 TEMPLATE.txt—Text Check Report Template

The TEMPLATE.txt files are the templates on the base of which the text report files are generated. They are in the DEFAULT/lang_XX/ directory. These template files as well as the text report files generated on their base are language-dependent (at present German—DE, English—DE, Japanese—JP). Since Q-CHECKER version V4 1.10, an output with UTF-8 encoding is possible. In previous Q-CHECKER versions the characters taken over from CATIA are edited in Latin-1 encoding. The representation of Japanese characters depends from the language settings of the respective computer.

In the TEMPLATE.txt files the administrator can change the settings for the output tables to be generated. To do so, a text editor is to be used. Which tables will be edited in the check reports can be controlled by the keywords below— every keyword controls that in the text report file a definite table is inserted. Keyword Table

TcChkTableOrgInformation • Organizational information

TcChkTableErrorsPriority • Listing: number of errors per priority

TcChkTableErrorsCriterion • Listing:

number of errors per check criterion

• Listing: number of errors per element TcChkTableErrorsElement /

Alternative: TcChkTableErrorsViolatedCriterionsOfElement

• Alternative: Listing: number of errors per element with violated criterion

TcChkTableErrorsEntitiesinCriterion • Listing: Error elements per criterion

TcChkTableErrorsinRoutines • Listing: Errors in routines



6.9 QCHECKER.usr—User Settings

In the QCHECKER.usr file, the latest user settings are saved. These settings are loaded when starting Q-CHECKER. The user dos not need to make entries in this file as these settings can be changed interactively in Q-CHECKER.

If for the folder and criteria names an other language than German, English or Japanese is to be used, the language setting in the QCHECKER.usr file must be made manually.

qchecker.USER_LANGUAGE DE



6.10 <COLORTABLENAME>.color—Color Table

N o t e : The name enclosed in angle brackets is given only as an example. Relevant to the file type is only the file name extension.

In order to create a new color table, the administrator has first to create a new file called <COLORTABLENAME.color> in the .../admin directory. Because of the

“.color” suffix, a new file automatically appears in the list of the color tables at the next start. The numbers 0 – 125 are assigned colors in this file. This occurs by allocation of red, green and blue portions, that all lie in the area between 0–15. Numbers that have not received a color maintain their default color. The numbers 0–5, which are identical to 133–138, represent the background color in DRAW, background color in SPACE, frame

color, and highlight color, lowlight color and menu color. The SAMPLE.color file is there as a table of reference.

NOTE:

If the process is running in batch, and the model that is being tested has a stored color table, then it will not be overwritten.

Example fi le:

# define the color values like this: # # colorID: red, green, blue # the values for red, green and blue are integers in a range

from 0 to 15 # (the ':' and ',' are optional) # # special colorID values are: # 0 or 133 -> DRAW background color # 1 or 134 -> SPACE background color # 2 or 135 -> Frame color # 3 or 136 -> Highlight color # 4 or 137 -> Lowint color # 5 or 138 -> Menu

1: 2, 0, 0 110: 15, 15, 0



6.11 <FILTERLIST>.filter—Filter List


In order to create a new filter table, the administrator has first to create a new file called <FILTERLIST>.filter in the .../admin directory. Because of the

“.filter” suffix, a new file automatically appears in the list of the filter tables at the next start.

These files have the following structure:

The filter name defined first, afterwards it is determined whether this filter must exist or not and in the end which layers are available in the filter.

Permitted Keywords:

• BEGIN_FILTER

• MUST_EXIST

• VISIBLE_LAYER

• END_FILTER

• YES

• NO

Example File:

BEGIN_FILTER FILTERWSP MUST_EXIST YES VISIBLE_LAYER 1,2,3,4 END_FILTER



6.12 ASSIGN.layer—Layer-to-Layer Transferring of Element Types According to Firms Rules

This file contains the data, required to process the element types transfer of the criterion 4.5.5 Layer-to-Layer Transferring of Element Types According to Firms Rules (see page 93).

Example File:

################################################################################# # # LAYER ( 0 - 240 ) DEFINITION FOR DAIMLER-CHRYSLER # LAYER DCLAYER[0] *SPC+*DRW LAYER DCLAYER[1,6] WIREFRAME LAYER DCLAYER[1-23][1,6] WIREFRAME LAYER DCLAYER[2,7] SURFACE LAYER DCLAYER[1-23][2,7] SURFACE LAYER DCLAYER[3,8] SOLID LAYER DCLAYER[1-23][3,8] SOLID LAYER DCLAYER[4,9] *DRW LAYER DCLAYER[1-23][4,9] *DRW LAYER DCLAYER[5,240] *SPC+*DRW LAYER DCLAYER[1-23][5,0] *SPC+*DRW # # # LAYER ( 0 - 241 ) DEFINITION FOR VW # # LAYER VWLAYER[0] *AXSD_(UNFIXED), *AXSD_(FIXED), *AXS_(UNFIXED),*AXS_(FIXED) LAYER VWLAYER[1-80] *SUR, *SUR_(BSRF), *SUR_(NRBS), *FAC, *SKI, *SKD, *VOL,*SOL_(SOLM_WITHOUT_HISTORY), *SOL_(SOLM_WITH_HISTORY), *SOL_(SOLE), *DIT LAYER VWLAYER[81-120] WIREFRAME LAYER VWLAYER[121-240] DRAW_BASIC_GEOMETRY LAYER VWLAYER[241] *DRW # # # ASSIGNMENT ( 1 - 48 ) DEFINITION FROM DAIMLER-CHRYSLER TO DAIMLER-CHRYSLER # # BEGIN_BLOCK "DCS" "DCS" ASSIGN DCLAYER[0] DCLAYER[0] ASSIGN DCLAYER[1-5] DCLAYER[1-5] ASSIGN DCLAYER[6-10] DCLAYER[6-10] ASSIGN DCLAYER[11-15] DCLAYER[11-15] ASSIGN DCLAYER[16-20] DCLAYER[16-20] ASSIGN DCLAYER[21-25] DCLAYER[21-25] ASSIGN DCLAYER[26-30] DCLAYER[26-30] ASSIGN DCLAYER[31-35] DCLAYER[31-35]



6.13 <TESTPROFILENAME>.qcprofile—Check Profile Settings


The <TESTPROFILENAME>.qcprofile file contains all settings of the check profile (parameters, options and tolerances) that are required for checking. This file is generated by the profile editor; it should not be edited with an text editor. It has to be noted that the

standard profiles are in the admin directory, and the user profiles are in the $HOME

directory (the catalog is controlled by the variable qcuser in the QCHECKER.dcls file). Moving a profile from the $HOME-directory into the admin-directory, causes that the user profile will be graded up to a standard profile.

Excerpts from an example fi le:

# Profil-Einstellungen # OptionsProfileMultiModel OFF # Prüf-Einstellungen # OptionsCheckAbortImmediately YES OptionsCheckModelAssessmentMode MAX_PRIORITY # Elementauswahl # Workspace ALL SetViewDraft ALL Show SHOWNOSHOW Pick PICKNOPICK LayerFilter ALL MultiSelect "*SPC+*DRW" # Force Update auf Solids # PreSolidForceUpdate NO PreSolidForceUpdateGroup 0 PreSolidForceUpdateSummon YES PreSolidForceUpdateWeight 1 # Farbtabelle setzen # PreColorTable NO PreColorTableGroup 0 PreColorTableSummon YES PreColorTableWeight 1 PreColorTableFilename "SAMPLE"



6.14 <PROJECTNAME>.prj—Comparison of the Project Environment


This file is used to define settings for the project environment and to compare these settings with the existing project environment of the model. The comparison is executed by the means of the criteria: Consistency of Patterns in Current PROJECT Environment, Consistency of Patterns in Current PROJECT Environment and Consistency of Attributes in Current PROJECT Environment (pages 103 et sqq.).

To start the comparison operation, the system administrator must, in an empty model, start with the command /m CHKPRJ an IUA routine and enter a file name. This file is stored in the admin directory of the Q-CHECKER as <PROJECTNAME>.prj, and contains the information available in the model concerning: pattern, descriptions for measurements and text, descriptions for attributes.



Excerpts from an example fi le:

#------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Attribute Table #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Pattern Table #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # TcPrjPatternNumber 1 TcPrjPatternIdentifier "HAT1 " TcPrjPatternComment " " TcPrjPatternType 1 TcPrjPatternLocked 0 TcPrjPatternHatchingTypes 1 TcPrjPatternHatchingOffset .000000D+00 TcPrjPatternHatchingAngle .450000D+02 TcPrjPatternHatchingPitch .160000D+02 TcPrjPatternHatchingTexture 3 TcPrjPatternHatchingThickness 2 TcPrjPatternHatchingColor 1 # #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Annotation Standards #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # TcPrjStandardNumber 1 TcPrjStandardIdentifier "ISO " # # #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Framing Descriptions #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # TcPrjDescriptionNumber 1 TcPrjDescriptionIdentifier "FRM_RECT " TcPrjDescriptionType 1 TcPrjDescriptionLocked 0 # #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Numerical Display Descriptions #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # TcPrjDescriptionNumber 1 TcPrjDescriptionIdentifier "NUM.DIMM " TcPrjDescriptionType 2 TcPrjDescriptionLocked 0 # #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # Tolerancing Descriptions #------------------------------------------------------------------------------- # TcPrjDescriptionNumber 1 TcPrjDescriptionIdentifier "TOL_NUM2 " TcPrjDescriptionType 4 TcPrjDescriptionLocked 0



6.15 <File-COMMENTNAME>.comment—Content of the File Comment


This file contains user settings concerning character sets in the File Comment. The Model Comment criterion (chapter 4.7.3.1 on page 129) compares these settings with the existing entries in the file comment of the model.

Example f i le:

BEGIN_BLOCK LINE 1 KEYWORD MUST_EXIST YES "TEST: " "PY|PZ" ERROR_MSG "*TEST* ERROR PY OR PZ" END_BLOCK BEGIN_BLOCK LINE 10- KEYWORD MUST_EXIST YES "TITLE:" MODELNAME ERROR_MSG "*ERROR* "modeltitle": not found." END_BLOCK BEGIN_BLOCK LINE - COLUMN 10 NUMBER 6 MODELNAME COLUMN 40 NUMBER 6 ERROR_MSG "*ERROR* YR-MOD: not found." END_BLOCK BEGIN_BLOCK LINE 1 KEYWORD "YR-MOD: " "^[A-Z0-9/]{6}" "[^XXXXXX]" ERROR_MSG "*ERROR* YR-MOD: "<year-model>" field not updated" "Please update field" END_BLOCK

A D D E N D U M A — W I L D C A R D S A N D G E N E R A L R E G U L A R E X P R E S S I O N S


Addendum A—Wildcards and General Regular Expressions In some of the Q-CHECKER text boxes it is possible to use for the name definition substitutes—either wildcards or regular expressions. This two possibilities—wildcards and regular expressions—differ from each other in their functions. Note the difference:

• Regular expressions in comparison to wildcards provide a much bigger definition potential.

• The characters * and ? in their function as wildcard have an other function than used within regular expressions.

Wildcards Wildcards are signs substituting one or several characters. In Q-CHECKER for the name definition the following wildcards can be used:

* matches: any number (zero, one ore more occurrences) of any characters

? matches: any single character

Examples:

body* matches 'body' and 'bodya', 'bodyb', 'bodyc' etc., and 'bodyaa', 'bodyab', 'bodyac' etc., and 'body1', 'body2', 'body3' etc., and 'body11', 'body12', 'body13' etc., and 'body.', 'body..', 'body#','body##'etc.

body? matches 'bodya', 'bodyb', 'bodyc' etc., and 'body1', 'body2', 'body3' etc., and 'body.', 'body#' etc.

Regular Express ions Regular Expressions are complex substitute expressions, consisting of normal characters (e. g. letters, digits) and metacharacters. Metacharacters are characters used not in their usual character signification, but in a special function: as operators, used to repeat or to group characters or to specify the position of characters and others.



Regular expressions are used to find characters or character strings in a text (the found strings are called matching the regular expression). This can be used in Q-CHECKER, for instance, to apply a check criterion only for elements, having in their name this character or string.

Metacharacters in regular expressions While, in regular expressions, ordinary characters stand for themselves, metacharacters in regular expressions have a special meaning, which is described in the following:

\ Escape character, annulling the special meaning of metacharacters in order to interpret them as normal characters (see the example below).

^ Caret sign—stands for the beginning of a line

or marks the beginning of a negative group,

which matches any character not in the list; e.g. [^0-9] matches any character except digits.

$ dollar sign—stands for the end of a line.

. Point—wildcard for any single character.

( ) Parentheses—group a series of pattern elements to a single element.

[ ] Square brackets: A set (or class) of characters enclosed by square brackets matches any single character of that set; e.g. [ABC] matches any oft the upper case letters A, B or C.

| Alternation operator (logical OR)— The regular expression with this operator matches any of the alternative strings e.g. A|B matches A and also B or strings containing A or B.

* Asterisk: Quantifier— the preceding element can be repeated 0 to n times.



+ Plus sign: Quantifier— the preceding element can be repeated 1 to n times.

? Question mark: quantifier— the preceding element can be repeated 0 or 1 time.

{ } Curly brackets: {m,n}— the preceding element must be repeated at least m times, but not more than n times.

Rank order in regular expressions Metacharacters within expressions are interpreted in a well-defined rank order:

1st rank: ( ) [ ] (parentheses, square brackets)

2nd rank: + * ? {n,m} (quantifiers)

3rd rank: abc ^ $ (characters/strings, starting position/end of an area)

4th rank: | (alternatives)

The ranking order makes every regular expression to be interpreted unambiguously. In the following, the regular expressions are described in detail.

Regular expressions for one character In the simplest case, a regular expression is a character string, matching only an identical character string, e. g.:

hallo matches 'hallo'

Generally all characters can be used. Some punctuation characters, however, have a special meaning and are reserved for certain functions (see above Metacharacters in regular expressions).

Escaping metacharacters with the \ sign To annul the special meaning of a metacharacter (to specify the character itself), before this metacharacter, a backslash \ must be put.

To find: * instead of * write: \*



Example:

hallo*again matches 'hallagain' and 'halloagain' and 'hallooagain' etc. (instead of *, zero, one or more characters „o“)

hallo\*again matches 'hallo*again'

If a search is to be executed for the backslash character itself (e. g. in path declarations as separator between the directory levels), two backslashes must be written one after the other in order to annul the special meaning of the backslash.

.*\\abc matches strings ‘abc’ in the names of directories of every level

The metacharacters ^ , $

The characters ^ and $ allow to search characters in a defined position in the

scanned area: The character ^ initiates a search at the start position, the character

$ initiates a search at the end position.

^EA matches the string 'EA', if it is at the beginning of the area.

EA$ matches the string 'EA', if it is at the end of the area.

^EA$ matches the string 'EA', if in the area are only these two characters.

For the „negative set of characters“ function of the metacharacter ^ see para-

graph „Character sets with the metacharacters [ , ] , - and ^ “.

The metacharacter . The point . stands for any character (one character).

h.llo matches 'hallo' and 'hello' and 'hlllo' and 'h.llo' etc.



Character sets with the metacharacters

[ , ] , - and ^

Characters can be combined into a character set, by being parenthesized with square

brackets [ ] . The character set defined between the brackets matches any s ing l e

character listed.

If between two signs a minus sign - is put, the expression matches any character in

the range of characters, starting from the first to the second character.

[XAEL] matches 'X' and 'A' and 'E' and 'L'.

[0-9] matches all characters from 0 to 9, i.e. all digits.

If behind the left square bracket, the first character is the caret sign ^ , the regular

expression specifies a ne ga t i ve se t o r r ange of characters. This expression matches any of the signs no t specified in the brackets.

[^a-z] matches all characters, that are not lower case letters

[^AEIOUaeiou] matches all characters that are not vowels

Inside a character set, all characters stand for themselves. An exception are the characters \

^ (caret sign—if it is at the beginning), and

- (minus sign—if it is between two characters).

If in a character set the actual signification of a minus s ign is to be expressed, the following notations can be used:

• inside a class of characters, instead of a simple – , it must be written: --- (three minus signs, not separated by blanks)

• When the – is in the f i r s t position or in end position, it is written without any additional sign.

If you want to include a caret sign ^ in a character set, it must be put in an other posi-

tion than in the first position (that position marks a negative character set; see above).

If you want to include a left [ or a right square bracket ] in a character set, it must

be written as the first character behind the left bracket.



[]a] matches ']' and 'a'

[a---b] matches 'a' and '-' and 'b'

[-a] matches 'a' and '-'

[a-] matches 'a' and '-'

[a^b] matches 'a' and '^' and 'b'

The metacharacter | The alternation operator | allows to specify several alternative search terms (logical

OR). The regular expression matches all strings that contain at least one of the specified alternative strings.

a|b matches 'a' and 'b'— this expression is identical with [ab]

a|bc|d matches 'a' and 'bc' and 'd'

(a|b)(c|d) matches 'ac' and 'ad' and 'bc' and 'bd'

power(boat|brake) matches 'powerboat' and 'powerbreak'

(shutt|crack)(er|le) matches 'shutter' and 'shuttle' and 'cracker' and 'crackle'

.*(old|ike) matches 'old' and 'ike', but also 'bold' and 'bike' and 'mold' and 'mike' and 'gold' and 'nike' (etc.)

In the first example, an alternative with two individual characters is formulated. However, in practice this notation is used only rarely, the more usual notation with the same func-tion is [ab]. For the individual alternatives, all the other functions of regular expressions can be used.

The metacharacters ( , )

Parentheses are used to group several individual characters—the characters in paren-theses are handled as a group. By parenthesizing characters, it is possible to alter the interpretation of a regular expression. Parentheses can be nested (it means parentheses can be used inside parentheses).

When a quantifier (e.g. * ) is put behind a group of parenthesized characters, the

operator refers not only to the preceding character, but to the whole character group—see the example „ban(an)*a”.



The metacharacter * With the character * is specified that the preceding character of the regular expression

can occur zero, one or more times (can occur several times, but is not obligatory).

.* matches any character or character string

hallo*again matches 'hallagain' and 'halloagain' 'hallooagain' etc.

ban(an)*a matches 'bana' and 'banana' and 'bananana' etc.

The metacharacter + The plus sign + specifies, that the preceding character can occur one or more times.

AB+C matches 'ABC' and 'ABBC' and 'ABBC' etc.

banan(an)+ matches 'banana' and 'bananana' and 'banananana' etc.

The metacharacter ? The character ? means that the preceding character is optional: The preceding charac-

ter can occur zero or one times.

hallo? matches 'hall' and 'hallo'

The metacharacters { , }

The curly brackets expression {m,n} is a counting quantifier, marking that the preceding character or group can

• must occur at least m-times, and

• can occur at most n-times.

Note:

• m and n must be positive integer numbers, and

• n >= m.



(ab){1,2} matches 'ab' and 'abab'

[AEIOUaeiuo]{2} matches double vowels e.g. AA, aa, EE, ee etc.

c([ad]){1,4}r matches 'car' and 'cdr' and 'caar' and 'cdar' and ... and 'caaar' and 'cdaar' and ... and 'cadddr' and 'cddddr'

Examples Note: The following examples are numbered, e.g. with (1). The numeration does not belong to the regular expression; it serves only as reference for the explanations to the examples.

( 1) a matches 'a' ax matches 'ax'

( 2) [ab] matches 'a' or 'b'

( 3) [A-Z] matches capitals (upper case letters)

( 4) [0-9] matches digits

( 5) [a-zA-Z0-9_] matches letters, digits and one underline

( 6) [^äöüÄÖÜ] matches any character except German umlauts

( 7) [^a-zA-Z] matches any character except letters

( 8) a. matches 'ab' and 'an' and 'a1' etc. (any character behind 'a')

( 9) ma.i matches 'mari' and 'maxi' (etc.), but not 'marri', 'maxxi'

(10) max? matches 'max', but also 'ma'

(11) a+ matches 'a' and 'aa' and 'aaa' etc. (one or more occurrences of 'a')

(12) (AB)+C matches 'ABC' and 'ABABC' and 'ABABABC' etc.

(13) [A-Z]+ matches every string, containing one or more capital letters



(14) a* matches ' ' and 'a' and 'aaaaa' (zero, one or more occurrences of 'a')

(15) ma.+i matches 'maxi' and 'mari' (etc.) and 'maxxi' and 'marri' and 'maxxxi' and 'marrri' (etc.) (one or more occurrences of any character)

(16) ma.*i matches 'mai' and 'maxi' and 'mari' (etc.) and 'maxxi' and 'marri' and 'maxxxi' and 'marrri' (etc.)

(no, one or more occurrences of any character)

(17) ma.?y matches 'may', but also 'mary', 'maxy' and 'many' etc. (zero or one occurrences of any character)

(18) x{10,20} matches successive letters 'x' in a minimal quantity of 10 and a maximal quantity of 20

(19) x{10} matches 10 successive letters 'x'

(20) x{2}y matches only with 'xxy'

(21) a.{2} matches strings, that begin with 'a' and have 3 characters

(22) ^maxi matches 'maxi' only at the beginning of the scanned area

(23) maxi$ matches 'maxi' only at the end of the scanned area

Explanation: (1) When searching for a single character, you can specify it without square

brackets. If you specify several successive characters without square brackets, they will be interpreted as a character string.

(2) When searching for a group of individual characters (character set), put them in square brackets.

(3), (4) A range of characters must be specified by giving the first character of the

range, a minus sign - and the last character.

(5) It is possible to combine several ranges of characters.



(6), (7) A ne ga t i ve se a rc h specification matches the characters that are no t specified. For that purpose, put the negative operator ^ before the

characters (individual characters or ranges) that not must occur.

(8), (9) The point . stands for any o ne character (its function is analogous to

the wildcard ? in the DOS/Windows operating systems file names, as it is

used in the file name search etc.).

(10) The question mark ? behind a character means: The character is f ac u l t a -

t i ve (it may occur, but do not must occur).

(11)-(13) The plus sign + behind a character means: The character must occur o ne

o r mo re times. If , before the plus sign, a group (12) or set (13) is specified, the plus sign applies for w ho l e the group or set.

(14) The asterisk * behind a character means: the preceding character can

occur several times, but does not must occur ( 0 to n occurrences).

(15)-(17) By combining a point . (standing for any character) with one of the signs

+ or * or ? , w i ldca rds are created. In contrast to the single

signs . , + and ? , with these wildcards the search is executed not

for concrete, but for any characters; the occurrence is defined by the second part of the wildcard: .+ Any character can occur one or more times

(occurrence n=1;2;3…∞). .* No character occurs or any character can occur one or more times

(occurrence n=0;1;2;3…∞). .? No character occurs or any character can occur once.

(occurrence n=0;1)

(18)-(21) Curly braces with a digit n, a comma and a digit m between stands for at

least n and at most m occurrences of the character before the curly braces.

Curly braces with a digit n between (without comma) stand for exactly n occurrences of the character before the curly braces.

(22) With the character ^ at the beginning of the search term, the character

string is found only if it is at the be g inn ing of the scanned area.

(23) With the dollar character $ at the end of the search term the character

string is found only if it is at the e nd of the scanned area.

* * *

A D D E N D U M B — O V E R V I E W : O L D A N D N E W N A M E S O F T H E G E O M E T R I C A L C H E C K C R I T E R I A


Addendum B—Overview: Old and New Names of the Geometrical Check Criteria To designate the geometrical check criteria, TransCAT since Q-CHECKER version 1.8.1 applies the names used in SASIG’s Product Data quality guidelines for the Global Automotive Industry.

As the SASIG classification of the check criteria is not so detailed as the TransCAT classification, the need arose to use certain of the SASIG criteria codes repeatedly (e. g. in contrast to the SASIG guidelines, TransCAT makes a distinction between mini-elements and mini-segments: Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI], Tiny Drawing Element Segment [G-DW-TI].

Check criteria that are not defined in the SASIG guidelines and thus have no SASIG code, by TransCAT are labeled with the parameter identifier “…-…-xx” (example: Undefined Surface Normal in Solid/SKD [G-SU-xx]).

The tables given below are provided to help the user to correlate old and new criteria names.

Sort sequence:

(1) The following tables are sorted according to the folder names (left column).

(2) The criteria inside the folders (on the left side of the tables) are arranged in alphabetical order.

If you want to find out for an old criterion name the correlated new criterion name, use the Old Criteria Names New Criteria Names table.

To find out for a new criterion name the correlated old criterion name, use the New Criteria Names Old Criteria Names table.



Old Criteria Names New Criteria Names

Old Folder Name Old Criterion

Name

New Folder Name

New Criterion Name

Identical Elements Drawing

Geometry / Drawing Embedded Drawing Elements [G-DW-EM]

Mini Elements Drawing

Geometry / Drawing Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI]

Mini Segments Drawing

Geometry / Drawing Tiny Drawing Element Segment [G-DW-TI]

Geometry / Drawing

Polynomial Degree Drawing

Geometry / Drawing High-Degree Drawing Element [G-DW-HD]

–

Geometry / Curves Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG]

Curvature Continuity Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Disconti-nuity) [G-CU-NS]

Identical Elements Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Embedded Curves and Points [G-CU-EM]

Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curves

Geometry / Curves Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK]

Mini Elements Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI]

Mini Segments Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI]

Normal Continuity Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Disconti-nuity) [G-CU-NT]

Point Continuity Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG]

Polynomial Degree Wireframe

Geometry / Curves High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD]

Self Intersection Wireframe

Geometry / Curves Self-Intersecting Curve [G-CU-IS]

Geometry / Wireframe

Waviness of Planar Curves

Geometry / Curves Wavy planar Curve [G-CU-WV]

Angle between Segment Boundary Curves

Geometry / Surfaces Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP]

Curvature Continuity Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Disconti-nuity) [G-SU-NS]

Identical Elements Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM]

Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface [G-SU-IK]

Mini Elements Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI]

Geometry / Surfaces

Mini Segment Boundary

Geometry / Surfaces Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC]




Name

New Folder Name

New Criterion Name

Mini Segments and Segment Partitioning Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]

Minimum Curvature Radius Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Small Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]

Normal Continuity Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Disconti-nuity) [G-SU-NT]

Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface

Geometry / Surfaces High Number of Control Points in NURBS Sur-face [G-SU-xx]

Number / Distribution of Segments

Geometry / Surfaces Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG]

Point Continuity Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG]

Polynomial Degree Surface

Geometry / Surfaces High-Degree Surface [G-SU-HD]

Turn Down of the Normals

Geometry / Surfaces Folded Surface [G-SU-FO]

Undefined Normal Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Undefined Surface Nor-mal [G-SU-xx]

Unused Segment Rows

Geometry / Surfaces Unused Surface Seg-ment Rows [G-SU-UN]

Waviness Surface

Geometry / Surfaces Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV] –

Geometry / Face Loops Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA]

Adequate Number of Segments in Boundary of Face

Geometry / Face Edges Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG]

Distance Boundary of Face to Surface

Geometry / Faces Large Face Edge to Sur-face Gap [G-FA-EG]

Equal Oriented Circula-tion of Boundary of Face

Geometry / Face Loops Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT]

Gaps between Bounda-ries of Face

Geometry / Face Loops Large Face Edge Gap [G-LO-LG]

Gaps Between Segments in Boundary of Face

Geometry / Face Edges Large Face Edge Seg-ment Gap [G-ED-LG]

Identical Elements Face

Geometry / Faces Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM]

Intersection or Contact of Boundary of Face

Geometry / Face Loops Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Mini Boundary Face

Geometry / Face Edges Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI] Mini Elements Face

Geometry / Faces Tiny Face [G-FA-TI] Mini Segments in Boundary of Face

Geometry / Face Edges Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI]

Geometry / Faces

Narrow Elements Face

Geometry / Faces Narrow Face [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]




Name

New Folder Name

New Criterion Name

Branch Out Topology

Geometry / Shells_Volumes

Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM]

Calculation of Topolo-gies


Calculation of Shells / Volumes [G-SH-xx]

Curvature Continuity Topology


Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS]

Normal Continuity Topology


Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT]

Open or overlapping Topology


Open or overlapping Shell / Volume [G-SH-FR]

Point Continuity Topology


Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG]

Sharp Edges Topology


Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA]

Geometry / Topologies

Uniform Orientation of Normals


Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell / Volume [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]

Cavities in Solid

Geometry / Solid / General

Solid Void [G-SO-VO]

Identical Elements Solid


Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM]

Mini Elements Solid


Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI]


Multi-Volume Solid


Multi-Volume Solid [G-SO-MU]

Angle Between Segment Boundary Curves (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Surfaces

Degenerate Surface Segment Corner in Solid / SKD [G-SU-DP]

Curvature Continuity (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Disconti-nuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SU-NS]

Identical Elements (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Embedded Surfaces in Solid / SKD [G-SU-EM]

Indistinct Knots in NURBS (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-IK]

Mini Elements (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Tiny Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-TI]


Mini Segment Boundary (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary in Solid / SKD [G-SU-DC]




Name

New Folder Name

New Criterion Name

Mini Segments and Segment Partitioning (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Narrow Surface Segment in Solid / SKD [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]

Minimum Curvature Radius (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Small Surface Radius of Curvature in Solid / SKD [G-SU-CR]

Normal Continuity (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Disconti-nuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SU-NT]

Number of Control Points in NURBS (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


High Number of Control Points in NURBS Sur-face in Solid / SKD [G-SU-xx]

Number / Distribution of Segments (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Fragmented Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-FG]

Point Continuity (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SU-LG]

Polynomial Degree (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


High-Degree Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-HD]

Turn Down of the Nor-mals (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Folded Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-FO]

Undefined Normal (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Undefined Surface Nor-mal in Solid / SKD [G-SU-xx]

Unused Segment Rows (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Unused Surface Seg-ment Rows in Solid / SKD [G-SU-UN]

Waviness (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Wavy Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-WV]

–

Geometry / Solid / Face Loops

Sharp Face Edge Angle in Solid / SKD [G-LO-SA]

Distance Boundary of Face to Surface in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Faces Large Face Edge to Sur-face Gap in Solid / SKD [G-FA-EG]

Equal Oriented Circula-tion of Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop in Solid / SKD [G-LO-IT]

Gaps between Bounda-ries (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Large Face Edge Gap in Solid / SKD [G-LO-LG]

Gaps Between Segments in Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Face Edges

Large Face Edge Seg-ment Gap in Solid / SKD [G-ED-LG]

Geometry / Solid / Faces

Identical Elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Faces Embedded Faces in Solid / SKD [G-FA-EM]




Name

New Folder Name

New Criterion Name

Intersection or Contact of Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Self-Intersecting Face Loop in Solid / SKD [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Mini Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Tiny Face Edge in Solid / SKD [G-ED-TI]

Mini Boundary Segment (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Tiny Face Edge Segment in Solid / SKD [G-ED-TI]

Mini Elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Faces Tiny Face in Solid / SKD [G-FA-TI]

Narrow Elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Faces Narrow Face in Solid / SKD [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Branch Out (Topology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Shells_Volumes

Over-Used Edge in Solid / SKD [G-SH-NM]

Curvature Continuity (Topology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SH-NS]

Normal Continuity (To-pology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SH-NT]

Open or overlapping Topology in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Open or overlapping Shell / Volume in Solid / SKD [G-SH-FR]

Point Continuity (Topo-logy) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SH-LG]

Sharp Edges (Topology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Sharp Face Angle in Solid / SKD [G-SH-SA]

Geometry / Solid / Topologies

Uniform Orientation of Normals in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell / Volume in Solid / SKD [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]



New Criteria Names Old Criteria Names

New Folder Name

New Criterion Name


Name

Embedded Curves and Points [G-CU-EM]

Geometry / Wireframe Identical Elements Wireframe

Fragmented Curve [G-CU-FG]

Geometry / Wireframe -

High-Degree Curve [G-CU-HD]

Geometry / Wireframe Polynomial Degree Wireframe

Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curve [G-CU-IK]

Geometry / Wireframe Indistinct Knots in NURBS Curves

Large Curve Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-CU-LG]

Geometry / Wireframe Point Continuity Wireframe

Non-Smooth Curve Segments (G2 Disconti-nuity) [G-CU-NS]

Geometry / Wireframe Curvature Continuity Wireframe

Non-Tangent Curve Segments (G1 Disconti-nuity) [G-CU-NT]

Geometry / Wireframe Normal Continuity Wireframe

Self-Intersecting Curve [G-CU-IS]

Geometry / Wireframe Self Intersection Wireframe

Tiny Curve [G-CU-TI]

Geometry / Wireframe Mini Elements Wireframe

Tiny Curve Segment [G-CU-TI]

Geometry / Wireframe Mini Segments Wireframe

Geometry / Curves

Wavy planar Curve [G-CU-WV]

Geometry / Wireframe Waviness of Planar Curves

Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary [G-SU-DC]

Geometry / Surfaces Mini Segment Boundary

Degenerate Surface Segment Corner [G-SU-DP]

Geometry / Surfaces Angle between Segment Boundary Curves

Embedded Surfaces [G-SU-EM]

Geometry / Surfaces Identical Elements Surface

Folded Surface [G-SU-FO]

Geometry / Surfaces Turn Down of the Normals

Fragmented Surface [G-SU-FG]

Geometry / Surfaces Number / Distribution of Segments

High Number of Control Points in NURBS Sur-face [G-SU-xx]

Geometry / Surfaces Number of Control Points in NURBS Surface

High-Degree Surface [G-SU-HD]

Geometry / Surfaces Polynomial Degree Surface

Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface [G-SU-IK]

Geometry / Surfaces Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface

Geometry / Surfaces

Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SU-LG]

Geometry / Surfaces Point Continuity Surface



New Folder Name

New Criterion Name


Name

Narrow Surface Segment [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]

Geometry / Surfaces Mini Segments and Segment Partitioning Surface

Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Disconti-nuity) [G-SU-NS]

Geometry / Surfaces Curvature Continuity Surface

Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Disconti-nuity) [G-SU-NT]

Geometry / Surfaces Normal Continuity Surface

Small Surface Radius of Curvature [G-SU-CR]

Geometry / Surfaces Minimum Curvature Radius Surface

Tiny Surface [G-SU-TI]

Geometry / Surfaces Mini Elements Surface Undefined Surface Nor-mal [G-SU-xx]

Geometry / Surfaces Undefined Normal Surface

Unused Surface Seg-ment Rows [G-SU-UN]

Geometry / Surfaces Unused Segment Rows

Wavy Surface [G-SU-WV]

Geometry / Surfaces Waviness Surface Fragmented Face Edge [G-ED-FG]

Geometry / Faces Adequate Number of Segments in Boundary of Face

Large Face Edge Seg-ment Gap [G-ED-LG]

Geometry / Faces Gaps Between Segments in Boundary of Face

Tiny Face Edge [G-ED-TI]

Geometry / Faces Mini Boundary Face

Geometry / Face Edges

Tiny Face Edge Segment [G-ED-TI]

Geometry / Faces Mini Segments in Boundary of Face

Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop [G-LO-IT]

Geometry / Faces Equal Oriented Circula-tion of Boundary of Face

Large Face Edge Gap [G-LO-LG]

Geometry / Faces Gaps between Bounda-ries of Face

Self-Intersecting Face Loop [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Geometry / Faces Intersection or Contact of Boundary of Face

Geometry / Face Loops

Sharp Face Edge Angle [G-LO-SA]

- -

Embedded Faces [G-FA-EM]

Geometry / Faces Identical Elements Face

Large Face Edge to Sur-face Gap [G-FA-EG]

Geometry / Faces Distance Boundary of Face to Surface

Narrow Face [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Geometry / Faces Narrow Elements Face

Geometry / Faces

Tiny Face [G-FA-TI]

Geometry / Faces Mini Elements Face Calculation of Shells / Volumes [G-SH-xx]

Geometry / Topologies Calculation of Topolo-gies

Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell / Volume [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]

Geometry / Topologies Uniform Orientation of Normals


Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) [G-SH-LG]

Geometry / Topologies Point Continuity Topology



New Folder Name

New Criterion Name


Name

Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NS]

Geometry / Topologies Curvature Continuity Topology

Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) [G-SH-NT]

Geometry / Topologies Normal Continuity Topology

Open or overlapping Shell / Volume [G-SH-FR]

Geometry / Topologies Open or overlapping Topology

Over-Used Edge [G-SH-NM]

Geometry / Topologies Branch Out Topology

Sharp Face Angle [G-SH-SA]

Geometry / Topologies Sharp Edges Topology

Degenerate Surface Segment Boundary in Solid / SKD [G-SU-DC]


Mini Segment Boundary (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Degenerate Surface Segment Corner in Solid / SKD [G-SU-DP]


Angle Between Segment Boundary Curves (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Embedded Surfaces in Solid / SKD [G-SU-EM]


Identical Elements (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Folded Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-FO]


Turn Down of the Nor-mals (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Fragmented Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-FG]


Number / Distribution of Segments (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

High Number of Control Points in NURBS Sur-face in Solid / SKD [G-SU-xx]


Number of Control Points in NURBS (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

High-Degree Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-HD]


Polynomial Degree (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Indistinct Knots in NURBS Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-IK]


Indistinct Knots in NURBS (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Large Surface Segment Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SU-LG]


Point Continuity (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Narrow Surface Segment in Solid / SKD [G-SU-NA, G-SU-RN]


Mini Segments and Segment Partitioning (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Non-Smooth Surface Segments (G2 Disconti-nuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SU-NS]


Curvature Continuity (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD



New Folder Name

New Criterion Name


Name

Non-Tangent Surface Segments (G1 Disconti-nuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SU-NT]


Normal Continuity (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Small Surface Radius of Curvature in Solid / SKD [G-SU-CR]


Minimum Curvature Radius (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Tiny Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-TI]


Mini Elements (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Undefined Surface Nor-mal in Solid / SKD [G-SU-xx]


Undefined Normal (Sur-face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Unused Surface Seg-ment Rows in Solid / SKD [G-SU-UN]


Unused Segment Rows (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Wavy Surface in Solid / SKD [G-SU-WV]


Waviness (Surface) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Fragmented Face Edge in Solid / SKD [G-ED-FG]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Adequate Number of Segments in Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Large Face Edge Seg-ment Gap in Solid / SKD [G-ED-LG]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Gaps Between Segments in Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Tiny Face Edge in Solid / SKD [G-ED-TI]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Mini Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Tiny Face Edge Segment in Solid / SKD [G-ED-TI]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Mini Boundary Segment (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Sharp Face Edge Angle in Solid / SKD [G-LO-SA]

– –

Inconsistent Face Edge Orientation in Loop in Solid / SKD [G-LO-IT]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Equal Oriented Circula-tion of Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Large Face Edge Gap in Solid / SKD [G-LO-LG]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Gaps between Bounda-ries (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Self-Intersecting Face Loop in Solid / SKD [G-LO-IS, G-FA-IS]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Intersection or Contact of Boundary (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Embedded Faces in Solid / SKD [G-FA-EM]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Identical Elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Large Face Edge to Sur-face Gap in Solid / SKD [G-FA-EG]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Distance Boundary of Face to Surface in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Narrow Face in Solid / SKD [G-FA-NA, G-FA-RN]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Narrow Elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Geometry / Solid / Faces

Tiny Face in Solid / SKD [G-FA-TI]

Geometry / Solid / Faces Mini Elements (Face) in B-REP of Solids / SKD



New Folder Name

New Criterion Name


Name

Inconsistent Surface Orientation on Shell / Volume in Solid / SKD [G-FA-IT, G-SH-IT]


Uniform Orientation of Normals in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Large Face Gaps (G0 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SH-LG]


Point Continuity (Topo-logy) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Non-Smooth Faces (G2 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SH-NS]


Curvature Continuity (Topology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Non-Tangent Faces (G1 Discontinuity) in Solid / SKD [G-SH-NT]


Normal Continuity (To-pology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Open or overlapping Shell / Volume in Solid / SKD [G-SH-FR]


Open or overlapping Topology in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Over-Used Edge in Solid / SKD [G-SH-NM]


Branch Out (Topology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD


Sharp Face Angle in Solid / SKD [G-SH-SA]


Sharp Edges (Topology) in B-REP of Solids / SKD

Embedded Solids [G-SO-EM]


Identical Elements Solid

Multi-Volume Solid [G-SO-MU]


Multi-Volume Solid

Solid Void [G-SO-VO]


Cavities in Solid


Tiny Solid [G-SO-TI]


Mini Elements Solid

Embedded Drawing Elements [G-DW-EM]

Geometry / Drawing Identical Elements Drawing

High-Degree Drawing Element [G-DW-HD]

Geometry / Drawing Polynomial Degree Drawing

Tiny Drawing Element [G-DW-TI]

Geometry / Drawing Mini Elements Drawing

Geometry / Drawing

Tiny Drawing Element Segment [G-DW-TI]

Geometry / Drawing Mini Segments Drawing

* * *

TRANSCAT in the Internet: http://www.transcat-plm.com/

Q-CHECKER in the Internet: http://www.q-checker.com/

Q-CHECKER Hotl ine:

Phone: +49 721 970 43 100 E-mail: [email protected]

© TransCAT GmbH & Co. KG, 2005

q-checker v1.11.2 for catia v4--user manualftp.transcat-plm.com/pub/tcsoft/qcheckerv4_1112/... ·...

Documents